DP-772 - Page protégée par mot de passe

DP-772
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in May 2014
843P2112
3P2SM062
Rev.2
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE
OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE
DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides
et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Revision history
Revision
Date
1
28 March 2014
2
15 May 2014
Replaced pages
Remarks
Contents,1-1-1,1-2-2,Installation guide, Address
-
Installation guide
-
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle (
) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Always ground the copier.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
3P2
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-2
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................... 1-1-3
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment......................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking.............................................................................................................................. 1-2-2
(1) Unpacking......................................................................................................................... 1-2-2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad .............................................................................................. 1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................ 1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ......................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list.............................................................................................. 1-3-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items .............................................................................. 1-3-3
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ..................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Original misfeed indication ............................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions............................................................................... 1-4-1
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................ 1-4-3
(1) Self-diagnostic function .................................................................................................... 1-4-3
(2) Self diagnostic codes........................................................................................................ 1-4-3
1-4-3 Electrical problems ................................................................................................................ 1-4-5
1-4-4 Mechanical problems............................................................................................................. 1-4-8
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly........................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Precautions....................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly ................................................................................................... 1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley ..................... 1-5-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ............................................................. 1-5-6
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS......................................................................................... 1-5-7
1-5-3 Image adjustment ................................................................................................................ 1-5-10
(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge ............................................................................... 1-5-10
(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge ................................................................................ 1-5-12
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement............................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) DP main PWB................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) DP SHD PWB................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
2-1 Mechanical Construction
2-1-1 Original feed section .............................................................................................................. 2-1-1
2-1-2 Original conveying section..................................................................................................... 2-1-3
3P2-1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PWBs................................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors....................................................................................................... 2-2-2
(3) Motors............................................................................................................................... 2-2-3
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 DP main PWB........................................................................................................................ 2-3-1
2-3-2 DP SHD PWB ........................................................................................................................ 2-3-6
2-4 Appendixes
2-4-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................ 2-4-1
(1) List of maintenance parts ................................................................................................. 2-4-1
(2) Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................... 2-4-2
(3) Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................. 2-4-4
INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
3P2-1
1-1-1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
Item
Specifications
Original feed method
Automatic feed
Supported original types
Sheet originals
Original sizes
Maximum: A3/ Ledger
Minimum : A6-R/ Statement-R
Original weights
Simplex: 35 to 220 g/m2
Duplex : 50 to 220 g/m2
Loading capacity
175 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) or less
When originals have different widths:30sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Power source
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Weight
Electrically connected to the machine.
600 × 513 × 170 mm
23 5/8 × 20 3/16 × 6 11/16”
14.5 kg/32 lb or less
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3P2
1-1-2 Parts names
5
2
2
6
1
3
4
Figure 1-1-1
1. Original tray
2. Original width guides
3. Original eject table
4. Original stopper
5. DP top cover
6. Cleaning cloth compartment
1-1-2
3P2
1-1-3 Machine cross section
2
1
3
Original path
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
1. Original feed section
2. Original conveying section
3. Original switchback/eject section
1-1-3
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
3P2
1-2-1 Installation environment
1-2 Installation
Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an abrupt
change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
1-2-1
3P2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking
(1) Unpacking
20
26
25
16
21
23
27
22
24
9
7
28
8
29
30
17
18
19
10
11
12
31
1
2
14
13
5
6
15
3
4
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
1. Document processor
2. Plastic sheet
3. Inner frame
4. Outer case
5. Front bottom pad
6. Rear bottom pad
7. Front left top pad
8. Front right top pad
9. Rear top pad
18. Fixing fitting
(38.5mm)
19. Fixing fitting (45mm)
20. Plastic bag
21. Pin
22. M4 x 14 TP screws
23. M3 x 8 black screw
24. M3 x 8 screws
25. Air-padded bag
10. Cleaning cloth
11. Plastic bag
12. Installation guide
13. Plastic bag
14. Original mat
15. Original mat holder
16. Air-padded bag
17. Angle control fitting
Caution: See the Installation Guide for installation.
1-2-2
26. DP relay PWB
27. Plastic bag
28. Right hinge cover
29. Left hinge cover
30. DP cable cover 1
31. DP cable cover 2
3P2
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
Procedure
1. Remove four tapes.
Tape
Protective sheet
Tapes
Tape
Figure 1-2-2
2. Open the DP top cover and original
width guides.
3. Remove the pad.
DP top cover
Original width guide
Pad
Original width guide
Figure 1-2-3
1-2-3
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-2-4
3P2
1-3-1 Maintenance mode
1-3 Maintenance Mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using
the numeric keys.
Maintenance mode is entered.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The maintenance item is selected.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Maintenance mode is exited.
End
1-3-1
3P2
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Section
General
Optical
Item
No.
Content of maintenance item
Initial setting
U000 Outputting an own-status report
-
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
-
U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
-
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DP center line
0/0
0/0/0
0/0/0/0
0/0/0
U073 Checking the scanner operation
-
U074 DP input response adjustment
1
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
125/125/125
U091 Setting the white line correction
112/112/112/75/0
U099 Adjusting original size detection
DP is not installed
20/30/40/20/30/40/20/30/40
DP is installed
50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50
U203 Checking DP operation
-
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
-
U244 Checking the DP switches
-
Mode setting U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
On/8
Operation
panel and
support
equipment
Image
processing
Other
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/
3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
-
U425 Setting the target
-
U905 Checking counts by optional devices
-
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
U990 Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light
1-3-2
0/0/0
-
3P2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Item No.
U000
Description
Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call
occurrences. Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB
memory.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
Output list
Maintenance
List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
User Status
Outputs the user status page
Service Status
Outputs the service status page
Event
Outputs the event log
Network Status
Outputs the network status page
All
Outputs the all reports
3. Press the start key. A list is output.
4. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
The output status is displayed.
Display
Description
Ready
List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
Active
Outputs the user status page
Complete
Outputs the service status page
Error
Outputs the event log
1-3-3
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
Method: Send to the USB memory
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has
gone off, switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [Text] or [HTML].
Display
Output list
Print
Outputs the report
USB (Text)
Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
USB (HTML)
Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)
8. Press the start key.
Output will be sent to the USB memory.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-4
3P2
Item No.
U000
Description
Event log
Event Log
MFP
(2) 27/Oct/2010 08:40
(1) Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27
(8) Paper Jam Log
#
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Count.
9999999
8888888
7777777
6666666
5555555
4444444
3333333
2222222
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666
555555 (a)
444444
1
(f) J0000:
0501.01.08.01.01
Count.
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666
555555
444444
1
(e)
Service Code
01.6000
01.2100
01.4000
01.6000
01.2100
01.4000
01.6000
01.2100
(10) Maintenance Log
#
Count.
Item
Log Data Nothing...
(11) Unknown toner Log
#
5
4
3
2
1
Count.
1111111
999999
888888
777777
666666
(4)
(5)
(6)
(12) Counter Log
Event Descriprions
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
(b) (c) (d)
4002.01.08.01.01
0501.01.08.01.01
4002.01.08.01.01
(9) Service Call Log
#
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(3)
[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Item
01.00
01.00
01.00
01.00
01.00
0
J0001: 1
J0002: 11
J0003: 222
J0004: 1
J0005: 1
J0006: 1
J0007: 1
J0008: 1
J0009: 1
J0010: 1
J0012: 999
J0013: 1
J0014: 1
J0015: 1
J0016: 1
J0017: 1
J0018: 1
J0019: 1
J0020: 1
J0021: 1
J0022: 1
J0023: 1
J0024: 1
J0025: 1
J0026: 1
J0027: 1
J0028: 1
J0029: 1
J0030: 1
J0031: 1
J0032: 1
J0033: 1
J0034: 1
J0035: 1
J0036: 1
J0037: 1
J0038: 1
J0039: 1
J0040: 1
J0041:
J0042:
J0043:
J0044:
J0045:
J0046:
J0047:
J0048:
J0049:
J0050:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(g) C0000: 0 (h) T00: 10
C0001:
C0002:
C0003:
C0004:
C0005:
C0006:
C0007:
C0008:
C0009:
C0010:
C0011:
C0012:
C0013:
C0014:
C0015:
C0016:
C0017:
C0018:
C0019:
C0020:
C0021:
C0022:
C0023:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
T01: 20
T02: 30
T03: 40
T04: 50
T05: 999
(7) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Figure 1-3-1
Detail of event log
No.
Items
(1)
System version
(2)
System date
(3)
Engine soft version
(4)
Engine boot version
Description
1-3-5
3P2
Item No.
U000
Description
Detail of event log
No.
Items
Description
(5)
Controller BROM version
(6)
Operation panel mask version
(7)
Machine serial number
(8)
Paper Jam
Log
#
Count.
The total page count
Remembers 1 to 16 of
occurrence. If the occur- at the time of the
paper jam.
rence of the previous
paper jam is less than
16, all of the paper jams
are logged. When the
occurrence excesseds
16, the oldest occurrence is removed.
Event
Log code (hexadecimal, 5 categories)
(a) Cause of a paper
jam
(b) Paper source
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to P.1-4-1 for paper jam location
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder/large capacity feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (side feeder/SMT paper feeder)
06: Cassette 6 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
07: Cassette 7 (side paper feeder/side large capacity feeder)
08 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
00: (Not specified)
01: Monarch
02: Business
03: International DL
04: International C5
05: Executive
06: Letter-R
86: Letter-E
07: Legal
08: A4R
88: A4E
09: B5R
89: B5E
0A: A3
1-3-6
0B: B4
0C: Ledger
0D: A5R
0E: A6
0F: B6
10: Commercial #9
11: Commercial #6
12: ISO B5
13: Custom size
1E: C4
1F: Postcard
20: Reply-paid postcard
21: Oficio II
22: Special 1
23: Special 2
24: A3 wide
25: Ledger wide
26: Full bleed paper
(12 x 8)
27: 8K
28: 16K-R
A8: 16K-E
32: Statement-R
B2: Statement-E
33: Folio
34: Western type 2
35: Western type 4
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
Items
(8) Paper Jam
cont. Log
Description
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain
02: Transparency
03: Preprinted
04: Labels
05: Bond
06: Recycled
07: Vellum
08: Rough
09: Letterhead
0A: Color
0B: Pre punched
0C: Envelope
0D: Cardstock
0E: Coated
0F: 2nd side
10: Media 16
11: High quality
15: Custom 1
16: Custom 2
17: Custom 3
18: Custom 4
19: Custom 5
1A: Custom 6
1B: Custom 7
1C: Custom 8
(e) Detail of paper eject location (Hexadecimal)
01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/1000-sheet finisher face up (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: 1000-sheet finisher face down (FD)
4000-sheet finisher main tray (FD)
05: Job separator tray
06: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 4000-sheet finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 4000-sheet finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
0F: 100-sheets Inner Job separator tray (FD)
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU)
29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD)
34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD)
48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU)
04/0D/0E: Reserved
1-3-7
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
(9)
(10)
Items
Service Call
Log
Maintenance
Log
Description
#
Count.
Service Code
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of self
diagnostics error. If
the occurrence of
the previous diagnostics error is less
than 8, all of the
diagnostics errors
are logged.
The total page
count at the time of
the self diagnostics
error.
Self diagnostic error code
(See page 1-4-3)
#
Count.
Remembers 1 to 8
of occurrence of
replacement. If the
occurrence of the
previous replacement of toner container is less than 8,
all of the occurrences of replacement are logged.
Code of maintenance
The total page
count at the time of replacing item
the replacement of (1 byte, 2 categories)
the toner container.
First byte (Replacing item)
01: Toner container
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
Example:
01.6000
01: Self diagnostic error
6000: Self diagnostic error
code number
Item
First byte (Replacing item)
02: Maintenance kit
Second byte
(Type of replacing item)
01: MK-8305A/8505A
02: MK-8305B/8505B
03: MK-8305C/8505C
(11)
Unknown
Toner Log
#
Count.
Item
Remembers 1 to 5
of occurrence of
unknown toner
detection. If the
occurrence of the
previous unknown
toner detection is
less than 5, all of the
unknown toner
detection are
logged.
The total page
count at the time of
the toner empty
error with using an
unknown toner
container.
Unknown toner log code
(1 byte, 2 categories)
1-3-8
First byte
01: Toner container (Fixed)
Second byte
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
(12)
Items
Counter Log
Comprised of
three log counters including
paper jams, self
diagnostics
errors, and
replacement of
the toner container.
Description
(f) Paper jam
(g) Self diagnostic
error
(h) Maintenance item
replacing
Indicates the log
counter of paper
jams depending on
location.
Indicates the log
counter of self diagnostics errors
depending on
cause.
(See page 1-3-5)
Indicates the log counter depending on the
maintenance item for
maintenance.
Refer to Paper Jam
Log.
Example:
All instances includ- C6000: 4
ing those are not
Self diagnostics
occurred are diserror 6000 has happlayed.
pened four times.
T: Toner container
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
M: Maintenance kit
01: MK-8305A/8505A
02: MK-8305B/8505B
03: MK-8305C/8505C
Example:
T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.
1-3-9
3P2
Item No.
U000
Description
Service status page (1)
Service Status Page
(2) 27/10/2010 12:00
MFP
(3)
(1) Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27
Controller Information
Memory status
(7) Total Size
Time
+01:00 Amsterdam
27/10/2010 12:00
10.183.53.13
(35) FRPO Status
Installed Options
(11) Document Processor
(12) Paper feeder
(13) Side Feeder
(14) Finisher
(15) Job Separator
(16) Document Guaed (A)
(17) Card Authentication Kit (B)
(18) Internet FAX Kit (A)
Installed
Cassette (500 x 2)
Cassette (3000)
1000-Finisher
Installed
Installed
Installed
Installed
Security Kit (E)
Installed
(19) Data Security Kit (E) Software Type I
Installed
(20) UG-34
Connected
(21) USB Keyboard
US-English
(22) USB Keyboard Type
Print Coverage
(23) Average(%)
(24) Total
(5)
(30) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2
(31) Rings (Normal)
3
(32) Rings (FAX/TEL)
3
(33) Rings (TAD)
3
(34) Option DIMM Size
16 MB
2.0 GB
(8) Local Time Zone
(9) Date and Time
(10) Time Server
(4)
[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
/ Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion)
/ 1111111.11
K: 1.10
/ 2222222.22
C: 2.20
/ 3333333.33
M: 3.30
/ 4444444.44
Y: 4.40
(25) Copy
/ 1111111.11
K: 1.10
C: 2.20
/ 2222222.22
M: 3.30
/ 3333333.33
Y: 4.40
/ 4444444.44
(26) Printer
K: 1.10
/ 1111111.11
C: 2.20
/ 2222222.22
M: 3.30
/ 3333333.33
Y: 4.40
/ 4444444.44
(27) FAX
K: 1.10
/ 1111111.11
(28) Period
(27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(29) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44
Default Pattern Switch B8
0
Default Font Number C5*1000+C2*100+C3 00000
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
e-MPS error control
0
RP Code
(36) 1234 5678 9012
(37) 5678 9012 3456
(38) 9012 3456 7890
(39) 3456 7890 1234
1
Figure 1-3-2
1-3-10
Y6
(6) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
3P2
Item No.
U000
Description
Service status page (2)
Service Status Page
27/10/2010 12:00
MFP
Firmware version 2LC_2000.000.000 2010.10.27
[XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Engine Information
(40) NVRAM Version
(41) Scanner Version
(42) FAX Slot1
FAX BOOT Version
FAX APL Version
FAX IPL Version
(43) MAC Address
Send Information
(44) Date and Time
(45) Address
_1F31225_1F31225
2LC_1200.001.089
10/10/27
5JT_5000.001.001
5JT_5100.001.001
5JT_5200.001.001
00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
1/2 (46) (47)
(48) 100/100
(49) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0
(50) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
(65)
(66)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(82)
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64)
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
00000000000000000000000000000000/0000000000000000000000000000000000000000/000000/ (67) (68) (69)
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
XXXXXXXX
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (78) (79)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (80) (81)
00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00
0/3/ (83) (84)
0/12.3/56.7/ (85) (86) (87)
1/1/1/0/1/0 2010/12/15 12:34:56 (88)
1/5/ (89)(90)
ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ (91)
2
Figure 1-3-3
1-3-11
[XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
3P2
Item No.
U000
Description
Detail of service status page
No.
Description
Supplement
(1)
Firmware version
-
(2)
System date
-
(3)
Engine soft version
-
(4)
Engine boot version
-
(5)
Operation panel mask version
-
(6)
Machine serial number
-
(7)
Total memory size
-
(8)
Local time zone
-
(9)
Report output date
Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(10)
NTP server name
-
(11)
Presence or absence of the
document processor
Installed/Not installed
(12)
Presence or absence of the
paper feeder
Paper feeder/Large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(13)
Presence or absence of the side
feeder
Side deck/Side multi tray/Side paper feeder/
Side large capacity feeder/Not Installed
(14)
Presence or absence of the
finisher
1000-sheet finisher/4000-sheet finisher/
Not Installed
(15)
Presence or absence of the
job separator
Installed/Not Installed
(16)
Presence or absence of the
printed document guard kit
Installed/Not Installed
(17)
Presence or absence of the IC
card authentication kit
Installed/Not Installed/Trial
(18)
Presence or absence of the
internet fax kit
Installed/Not Installed
(19)
Presence or absence of the
data security kit
Installed/Not Installed
(20)
Presence or absence of the
UG-34
Installed/Not Installed
(21)
Presence or absence of the
USB keyboard
Connected/Not connected
(22)
USB keyboard setting display
US-English/US-English with Euro/German/French
(23)
Page of relation to the A4/Letter
-
(24)
Average coverage for total
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(25)
Average coverage for copy
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(26)
Average coverage for printer
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(27)
Average coverage for fax
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
1-3-12
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
Description
Supplement
(28)
Cleared date and output date
-
(29)
Coverage on the final output
page
-
(30)
Fax kit information
This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(31)
Number of rings
0 to 15
(32)
Number of rings before automatic switching
0 to 15
(33)
Number of rings before connect- 0 to 15
ing to answering machine
(34)
Optional DIMM size
-
(35)
FRPO setting
-
(36)
RP code
Code the engine software version and the date of
update.
(37)
RP code
Code the main software version and the date of
update.
(38)
RP code
Code the engine software version and the date of
the previous update.
(39)
RP code
Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
(40)
NV RAM version
_ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a) (b)
(c) (d) (e)
(f)
(a) Consistency of the present software version
and the database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version
and the ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and
(e) are identical with (c) and (f).
(41)
Scanner firmware version
-
(42)
Fax firmware version
This item is printed only when the fax kit is
installed.
(43)
Mac address
-
1-3-13
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
Description
Supplement
(44)
The last sent date and time
-
(45)
Transmission address
-
(46)
Destination information
-
(47)
Area information
-
(48)
Margin settings
Top margin/Left margin
(49)
Margin/Page length/Page width
settings
Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/
Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/
Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/
Page width integer part/Page width decimal part
Life counter (The first line)
Machine life/MP tray/Cassette 1/Cassette 2/
Cassette 3/Cassette 4/Cassette 5/Cassette 6/
Cassette 7/Duplex
(50)
Life counter (The second line)
Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/
Transfer belt unit/Developer unit K/
Developer unit C/Developer unit M/
Developer unit Y/Maintenance kit A/
Maintenance kit B/Maintenance kit C
(51)
Panel lock information
0: Off/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock
(52)
USB information
U00: Not installed/U01: Full speed/U02: Hi speed
(53)
Paper handling information
0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(54)
Color printing double count
mode
0: All single counts
1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(55)
Black and white printing double
count mode
0: All single counts
1: A3, Single count, Less than 420 mm (length)
2: Legal, Single count, 356 mm or less (length)
3: Folio, Single count, Less than 330 mm (length)
(56)
Billing counting timing
-
(57)
Temperature (machine inside)
-
(58)
Temperature (machine outside)
-
(59)
Relative humidity
(machine outside)
-
(60)
Humidity (machine inside)
-
(61)
Fixed assets number
-
(62)
Job end judgment time-out time
-
(63)
Job end detection mode
-
(64)
Prescribe environment reset
0: Off
1: On
1-3-14
3P2
Item No.
Description
No.
Description
Supplement
(65)
Media type attributes
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20)
Weight settings
0: Light
1: Normal 1
2: Normal 2
3: Normal 3
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2
6: Heavy 3
7: Extra Heavy
(66)
Calibration information
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(67)
Calibration information
-
(68)
Calibration information
-
(69)
Calibration information
-
(70)
Calibration information
-
(71)
Calibration information
-
(72)
Calibration information
-
(73)
Calibration information
-
(74)
Calibration information
-
(75)
Calibration information
-
(76)
RFID information
-
(77)
RFID reader/writer version information
-
(78)
Color table version for printer
-
(79)
Color table 2 version for printer
-
(80)
Color table version for copy
-
(81)
Color table 2 version for copy
-
(82)
Maintenance information
-
(83)
Altitude
0: Standard
1: High altitude 1
2: High altitude 2
(84)
Charger roller correction
1 to 5
(85)
Configuring toner coverage
counters
0: Full-color count display
1: Color coverage count display
(86)
Low coverage setting
0.1 to 100.0
(87)
Middle coverage setting
0.1 to 100.0
(88)
Data Sanitization information
-
(89)
Toner low setting
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1-3-15
Fuser settings
0: High
1: Middle
2: Low
3: Vellum
Duplex settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
3P2
Item No.
Description
U000
No.
Description
Supplement
(90)
Toner low detection level
0 to 100 (%)
(91)
Drum serial number
Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
Code conversion
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U001
Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U061
Checking the operation of the exposure lamp
Description
Lights the exposure lamp.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamp are turned on.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display
Description
CCD
The exposure lamp lights
CIS
The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed)
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-16
3P2
Item No.
U068
Description
Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
DP Read
Starting position adjustment for
scanning originals
-38 to 38
0
0.158 mm
Black Line
Scanning position for the test
copy originals
0 to 3
0
-
2. Select [DP Read].
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to
the left when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select [Black Line].
6. Change the setting using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-17
3P2
Item No.
U070
Description
Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
DP is used.
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction when the CIS
is used.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Display
Setting
range
Description
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
Sub Scan(F)
Magnification in the auxiliary
scanning direction of CCD
(first side)
-125 to 125 0
0.02 %
Main
Scan(CIS)
Magnification in the main scan- -100 to 100 0
ning direction of CIS
0.02 %
Sub
Scan(CIS)
Magnification in the auxiliary
scanning direction of CIS
0.02 %
-125 to 125 0
Adjustment: [Sub Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value makes the image longer, while decreasing the value makes the image
shorter.
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-3-4
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-18
Copy
example 2
3P2
Item No.
U070
Description
Adjustment: [Main Scan]
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the setting enlarges the image and decreasing it narrows the image.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-3-5
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U039
U070
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-19
3P2
Item No.
U071
Description
Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
Front Head
Leading edge registration of
CCD (first side)
-32 to 32
0
0.085 mm
Front Tail
Trailing edge registration of
CCD (first side)
-32 to 32
0
0.085 mm
CIS Head
Leading edge registration of
CCD
-32 to 32
0
0.085 mm
CIS Tail
Trailing edge registration of
CCD
-32 to 32
0
0.085 mm
1-3-20
3P2
Item No.
U071
Description
Adjustment: Leading edge registration
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image forward and decreasing the value moves the image
backward.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-3-6
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following
adjustments in maintenance mode.
U039
U034
U071
Adjustment: Trailing edge registration
1. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Original
Copy
Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-3-7
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-21
3P2
Item No.
U072
Description
Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy
image when the DP is used.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.l
Display
Setting
range
Description
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
Front
DP center line (first side)
-60 to 60
0
0.085 mm
CIS
CIS center line
-39 to 39
0
0.085 mm
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Increasing the value moves the image rightward and decreasing it moves the image leftward.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-3-8
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Caution
If the first side is adjusted, check the second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
If the above adjustment does not optimize the center line, proceed with the following maintenance modes.
U034
U065
U067
U072
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-22
3P2
Item No.
U073
Description
Checking the scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation. This is also done to check the accumulation of dust on the slit
glass.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display
Description
Scanner Motor
Scanner operation
Home Position
Home position operation
Dust Check
Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP Reading
DP scanning position operation
Setting: [Scanner Motor]
1. Select [Scanner Motor].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display
Operating conditions
Setting range
Zoom
Magnification
25 to 400 %
Size
Original size
See below.
Lamp
On and off of the exposure lamp
0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting
Paper size
Setting
Paper size
5000
A4
5000
A5R
4300
B5
7800
Folio
5100
11" x 8 1/2"
10200
11" x 17"
10000
A3
9000
11" x 15"
8600
B4
8400
8 1/2" x 14"
7100
A4R
6600
8 1/2" x 11"
6100
B5R
5100
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
7. To stop operation, press the stop key.
1-3-23
3P2
Item No.
U073
Description
Method: [Home Position]
1. Select [Home Position].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.
Method: [Dust Check]
1. Select [Dust Check].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.
Method: [DP Reading]
1. Select [DP Reading].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.
Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U074
DP input response adjustment
Description
Sets the density correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original or a document
with a background that is slightly colored is scanned from the DP.
Perform adjustment if the page scanned using the table and the page scanned using DP do not
match.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display
Coefficient
Description
Compensating original document
scanning density
Setting
range
0 to 3
Initial
setting
1
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt
copying mode (which is activated by pressing the system menu key).
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-24
3P2
Item No.
U087
Description
Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing
edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust
is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Using image correction to reduce black streaks.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to
original reading position.
Caution
The coordinates of position where documents are scanned are modified when [System Menu]
[Adjustment/Maintenance] [Correcting Black Line] is set to [Off].
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display
Description
CCD
Setting of standard data when dust is detected.
Black Line
Initialization of original reading position.
Setting: [CCD]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
setting
R
Lowest density of the R regard as the dust
0 to 255
125
G
Lowest density of the G regard as the dust
0 to 255
125
B
Lowest density of the B regard as the dust
0 to 255
125
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Method: [Black Line]
1. Select [Clear].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-25
3P2
Item No.
U091
Description
Setting the white line correction
Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of
abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP driver PWB or CIS roller.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display
Description
Calculation(R)
Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G)
Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B)
Abnormal pixel count result for color B
Threshold(R)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color R
Threshold(G)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color G
Threshold(B)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection threshold value for color B
Threshold
(Abnormal)
Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
Mode
Switching between white line correction mode ON/OFF
Execute
Holding of white reference data
Method: white line correction
1. Press [Execute].
2. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
3. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
6. Press the start key.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed. (1st sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band, 2nd sheet:
Blank paper (There is a case of an approx. 60 mm gray band.))
7. If no vertical lines appear on either sheet, the setting has been completed normally.
If vertical black lines appear on the blank paper (gray band) and vertical white lines appear in
the black band in the same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat
white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has
been completed normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus
the engine must be checked.
8. Press the system menu key.
Mode is set to 1.
1-3-26
3P2
Item No.
U091
Description
How to view test copies
blank sheet
black band
Causes
Corrective measures
No lines
No lines
-
Complete
Black lines
White lines
Dirty CIS roller or CIS
glass
Clean CIS roller or CIS glass
and then perform U091 again
Black lines
No lines
Engine side
U091 ends, check engine
No lines
White lines
Engine side
U091 ends, check engine
Setting: Threshold value setting
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
setting
Threshold(R)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection
threshold value for color R
0 to 1023
112
Threshold(G)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection
threshold value for color G
0 to 1023
112
Threshold(B)
Displaying of abnormal pixel detection
threshold value for color B
0 to 1023
112
Threshold
(Abnormal)
Abnormal pixel threshold value setting
0 to 8191
75
Mode
Switching between white line correction
mode ON/OFF
0: OFF/
1: ON/
2: Test mode
0
* : Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112, the initial setting.
If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty, raise the set value.
If fine lines in some originals disappear, lower the set value.
Set within the range 50 to 200. (If set outside this range, the image may be affected.)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-27
3P2
Item No.
U099
Description
Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
Modify the threshold of detection if documents are frequently mal-detected in size after scanning
a wholly dark document or a document enclosed with dark objects on edges.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display
Description
Data1
Displaying original size detection transmission data
B/W Level1
B/W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value
Data2
Displaying original size sensor transmission data
(when DP is installed)
Method: [Data1/Data2]
1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. The detection sensor transmission data
is displayed.
2. The light source illuminates and the CCD sensor determines the width of the document. The
original size sensor determines the document is vertical or horizontal. (The document is
detected two times when the DP is installed.)
Display
Description
Original Area R
Detected original width size for color (R)
Original Area G
Detected original width size for color (G)
Original Area B
Detected original width size for color (B)
Original Area
Detected original width size
Size SW L
Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF
1-3-28
3P2
Item No.
U099
Description
Setting: [B/W Level1]
1. Select an item to be set.
Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Display
Setting
range
Description
Initial
setting*
Original R1
Original threshold value for color R (near side)
0 to 255
20/50
Original R2
Original threshold value for color R (center)
0 to 255
30/50
Original R3
Original threshold value for color R (far side)
0 to 255
40/50
Original G1
Original threshold value for color G (near side)
0 to 255
20/50
Original G2
Original threshold value for color G (center)
0 to 255
30/50
Original G3
Original threshold value for color G (far side)
0 to 255
40/50
Original B1
Original threshold value for color B (near side)
0 to 255
20/50
Original B2
Original threshold value for color B (center)
0 to 255
30/50
Original B3
Original threshold value for color B (far side)
0 to 255
40/50
*:DP is not installed/DP is installed
Reducing the value increases the sensitivity of the sensor allowing a document with more density
to be detected, however, the document mat could be detected as an original document.
If the values vary excessively, mal-detection could occur depending on how a document is
placed.
Original mat
1
2
3
297 mm
Fig.
Original
R/G/B
1
1
A4R to A3
8.5" to 11"
2
2
B6R to A4R
5.5" to 8.5"
3
3
to B6R
to 5.5"
Original width size range
Figure 1-3-9
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-29
3P2
Item No.
U203
Description
Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the speed to be operated.
Display
Description
Normal Speed
Normal reading (600 dpi)
High Speed
High-speed reading
4. Select the item to be operated.
Display
Description
CCD ADP
With paper, single-sided original of CCD
CIS
With paper, double-sided original of CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P)
Without paper, single-sided original of CCD
(continuous operation)
CIS (Non-P)
Without paper, double-sided original of CIS
(continuous operation)
5. Press the start key. The operation starts.
6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-30
3P2
Item No.
U243
Description
Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display
Description
Feed Motor
DP feed motor (DPOFM) is turned on
Conv Motor
DP conveying motor (DPOCM) is turned on
Lift Motor
DP lift motor (DPLM) is turned on
Eje Motor
DP eject motor (DPEM) is turned on
Reg Motor
DP registration motor (DPRM) is turned on
DP Fan
DP fan motor1 (DPFM1) is turned on
CIS Fan
DP fan motor2 (DPFM2) is turned on
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.
Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-31
3P2
Item No.
U244
Description
Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches and sensors in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the DP operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch or sensor is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch or
sensor reverses.
Display
Switches and sensors
Feed
DP feed sensor (DPFS)
Timing
DP timing sensor (DPTS)
CIS Head
DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
Set
DP original sensor (DPOS)
Longitudinal
DP original length switch (DPOLSW)
Lift U-Limit
DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1)
Lift L-Limit
DP lift sensor 2 (DPLS2)
Cover Open
DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
Open
DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
Eject
DP eject sensor (DPES)
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-32
3P2
Item No.
U326
Description
Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease
by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set. The screen for setting each item is displayed.
Display
Description
Black Line Mode
Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
Black Line Cnt
Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Setting: [Black Line Mode]
1. Select [On] or [Off].
Display
Description
On
Displays the cleaning guidance
Off
Not to display the cleaning guidance
* : Initial setting: On
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Setting: [Black Line Cnt]
1. Select [Cnt].
2. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys.
Display
Cnt
Description
Setting counts of the cleaning guidance
indication ( x 1000 sheets)
Setting
range
0 to 255
Initial
setting
8
* : When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is
detected.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-33
3P2
Item No.
U404
Description
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.
Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
A Margin
DP left margin
0.0 to 10.0 3.0
0.5 mm
B Margin
DP leading edge margin
0.0 to 10.0 2.5
0.5 mm
C Margin
DP right margin
0.0 to 10.0 3.0
0.5 mm
D Margin
DP trailing edge margin
0.0 to 10.0 4.0
0.5 mm
A Margin
(Back)
DP left margin (second side)
0.0 to 10.0 3.0
0.5 mm
B Margin
(Back)
DP leading edge margin
(second side)
0.0 to 10.0 2.5
0.5 mm
C Margin
(Back)
DP right margin (second side)
0.0 to 10.0 3.0
0.5 mm
D Margin
(Back)
DP trailing edge margin
(second side)
0.0 to 10.0 4.0
0.5 mm
6. Change the setting value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DP leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm)
DP left margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
DP right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
DP trailing edge margin
(4.0 mm or less)
Figure 1-3-10
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-34
3P2
Item No.
0404
Description
Caution
If the above adjustment does not optimize the margins, perform the following maintenance
modes.
U039
U034
U402
U403
U404
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-35
3P2
Item No.
U411
Description
Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP
scanning sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Perform adjustments using a new test chart (chart 1) when replacing ISC PWB, LED lamp PWB,
ISU, CIS and/or DP main PWB.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display
Original to be used
for adjustment (P/N)
Description
Table (Chart1)
Automatic adjustment in the scanner section (chart 1)
7505000005
DP FaceUp
(Chart1)
Do not use.
Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (first side) (chart 1)
7505000005
DP FaceDown
(Chart1)
Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (second side) (chart 1)
7505000005
Table (Chart2)
Automatic adjustment in the scanner section (chart 2)
302FZ56990
DP FaceUp
(Chart2)
Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (first side) (chart 2)
302AC68243
DP FaceDown
(Chart2)
Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning
section (second side) (chart 2)
302AC68243/
303JX57010/
303JX57020
Target
Set-up for obtaining the target value
-
DP Auto Adj
Automatic adjustment of automatic document processor using the chart printed
from the machine
-
Method: [Table (Chart1)]
To manually enter the target value
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.
1-3-36
3P2
Item No.
U411
Description
To automatically enter the target value
1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart1)].
7. Select the item.
Display
Description
All
Executing the all scanner adjustment
LED/AGC
Executing the adjustment for LED light quantity/AGC
White
Executing the white reference compensation coefficient
Input
Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
C.A.
Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF
Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma
Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix
Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart1)]
To manually enter the target value
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face up.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
To automatically enter the target value
1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face up.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart1)].
7. Select [Input].
1-3-37
3P2
Item No.
Description
U411
Display
Input
Description
Executing the adjustment for input gamma and matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart1)]
To manually enter the target value
1. Enter the target values which are shown at the bottom of the specified original
(P/N: 7505000005) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the DP face down.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
To automatically enter the target value
1. Enter the value for [Adjust Original] using maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the DP face down.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [Auto] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceDown (Chart1)].
7. Select [All].
Display
All
Description
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second
side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
1-3-38
3P2
Item No.
U411
Description
Method: [Table (Chart2)]
1. Enter the target values which are shown on the back of the specified original
(P/N: 302FZ56990) executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original on the platen.
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [Table (Chart2)].
7. Select the item.
Display
Description
All
Executing the all scanner adjustment
Input
Executing the adjustment for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
C.A.
Executing the adjustment for chromatic aberration filter
MTF
Executing the adjustment for MTF filter
Gamma
Executing the adjustment for input gamma
Matrix
Executing the adjustment for matrix
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Method: [DP FaceUp (Chart2)]
1. Measure the leading edge, main scanning, and auxiliary scanning of the specified original (P/
N: 302AC68243) and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) on the DP.
Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 1-3-11
3. Enter maintenance item U411.
4. Select [Target].
5. Select [U425] and press the start key.
6. Select [DP FaceUp (Chart2)].
7. Select [INPUT].
Display
Input
Description
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (first
side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
1-3-39
3P2
Item No.
Description
U411
8. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Method: [DP FaceDown (Chart2)]
1. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the
platen, and press the start key.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen,
and press the start key.
When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
3. Select the item.
Display
Description
Original to be used
for adjustment (P/N)
All
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for magnification, leading edge timing, center line, MTF
filter, input gamma and matrix
302AC68243/
303JX57010/
303JX57020
Input
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for magnification, leading edge timing and center line
302AC68243
MTF/Gamma
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for MTF filter
and input gamma
303JX57010
Matrix
Executing the adjustment in the DP scanning section (second side) for matrix
303JX57020
[Input]
1. Select [Input].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC6824) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
[MTF/Gamma]
1. Select [MTF/Gamma].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
[Matrix]
1. Select [Matrix].
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020) on the DP face down.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [Input], [MTF/Gamma] and [Matrix] can be executed at
once. When adjusting, place the three specified originals on the DP face down, and then press
the start key.
Set the original 303JX57020, and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top
of the original.
1-3-40
3P2
Item No.
U411
Description
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Method: [DP Auto Adj]
1. Load A4/letter paper.
2. Press the start key to output the original for adjustment.
3. Set the output the original for adjustment and press the start key.
4. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face up.
5. Press the start key to scan documents.
6. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of first side starts.
7. Set the output the original for adjustment on the DP face down.
8. Press the start key to scan documents.
9. Press the start key. Auto adjustment of second side starts.
* : When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If a problem
occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed and operation stops. Should this
happen, determine the details of the problem and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Error Codes
Codes
Description
01
Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge
skew)
02
Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction far end skew)
03
Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction near end skew)
03
Black band detection error (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge
skew)
04
Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
05
Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction far end)
06
Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction near end)
07
Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
08
Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction far end)
09
Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction near end)
0a
Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge)
0b
Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction leading edge original check)
0c
Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0d
White band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
0e
DMA time out
0f
Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
10
Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge error
11
Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge error
1-3-41
3P2
Item No.
U411
Description
Error Codes
Codes
Description
12
DP uxiliary scanning direction skew error
13
Maintenance request error
14
Main scanning direction center line error
15
DP main scanning direction skew error
16
Main scanning direction magnification error
17
Service call error
18
DP paper misfeed error
19
PWB replacement error
1a
Original error
1b
Input gamma adjustment original error
1c
Matrix adjustment original error
1d
Original for the white reference compensation coefficient error
1e
Lab value searching error
1f
Lab value comparing error
63
Completed to obtain a test RAW
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-42
3P2
Item No.
U425
Description
Setting the target
Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated of the chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005) or chart 2
(P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.
Method
1. Press the start key.
Select the chart to be used.
Display
Description
Chart1
Chart 1 (P/N: 7505000005)
Chart2
Chart 2 (P/N: 302FZ56990)
Method: [Chart1]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display
Description
White
Setting the white patch for the original for adjustment
Black
Setting the black patch for the original for adjustment
Gray1
Setting the Gray1 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray2
Setting the Gray2 patch for the original for adjustment
Gray3
Setting the Gray3 patch for the original for adjustment
C
Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M
Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y
Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R
Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G
Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B
Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original
Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
3. Select the item to be set.
Display
Description
Setting range
L
Setting the L value
0.0 to 100.0
a
Setting the a value
-200.0 to 200.0
b
Setting the b value
-200.0 to 200.0
4. Enters the value that is indicated on the face of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
5. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-43
3P2
Item No.
Description
U425
Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A, B
and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top of black belt 1 of the original at A
(30 mm from the left edge), B (148.5 mm from the left edge) and C (267 mm from the left
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + B + C) / 3)
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor+/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist1].
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the left edge to the right edge black belt 2 of the original at F
(15 mm from the top edge of black belt 1).
5. Enter the values using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist2].
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
7. Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D and E.
1) Measure the distance from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom of black belt 3 of the
original at D (30 mm from the left edge) and E (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2 + E/2)
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor +/- keys or numeric keys in [Dist3].
9. Press the start key. The value is set.
30mm
15mm
A
148.5mm
Black belt 1
267mm
B
C
Leading edge
F
D
E
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
Left edge
Black
belt 2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Original for adjustment (P/N:7505000005)
Figure 1-3-12
1-3-44
Black belt 3
3P2
Item No.
U425
Description
Method: [Chart2]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display
Description
CCD
Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990)
used for adjustment
DP
Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N:
302AC68243) used for adjustment
CIS
Execution is not required
Method: [CCD]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display
Description
N875
Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
N475
Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment
N125
Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment
C
Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
M
Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
Y
Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
R
Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
G
Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
B
Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
Adjust Original
Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions
2. Select the item to be set.
Display
Description
Setting range
L
Setting the L value
0.0 to 100.0
a
Setting the a value
-200.0 to 200.0
b
Setting the b value
-200.0 to 200.0
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/- keys or numeric keys.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
1-3-45
3P2
Item No.
Description
U425
Setting: [Adjust Original]
1. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A, B and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (30 mm from
the leading edge), B (148.5 mm from the leading edge) and C (267 mm from the leading
edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
2. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Lead].
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D, E and F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D (35 mm from
the left edge), E (110 mm from the left edge) and F (185 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
5. Enter the values solved using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Main Scan].
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
7. Measure the length (G) from the edge of the black belt (a) to edge of N475 of the original.
8. Enter the measured value using the cursor left/right keys or numeric keys in [Sub Scan].
9. Press the start key. The value is set.
Leading edge
Left edge
35 mm
148.5 mm
30 mm
A
267 mm
B
Black
belt (a)
D
Black
belt (b)
110 mm
C
E
Black
belt (c)
G
[Lead] =
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
[Main Scan] =
((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
185 mm
[Sub Scan] = G
F
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990)
Figure 1-3-13
1-3-46
3P2
Item No.
U425
Description
Setting: [DP]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A.
2. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Lead].
3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B.
4. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Main Scan].
5. Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge (inside) to the black belt of trailing
edge (inside) of the original at C.
6. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [Sub Scan].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
B
A
C
Original for adjustment (P/N: 302AC68243)
Figure 1-3-14
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-47
3P2
Item No.
U905
Description
Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of document processor or 1000/4000-sheet document finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of document processor or 1000/4000-sheet document finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the device to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display
Description
DP
Counts of document processor
DF
Counts of 1000/4000-sheet document finisher
DP
Display
Description
ADP
Counts of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CIS
Counts of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
DF
Display
Description
Sorter
Counts of copies that has passed through the sorter
Staple
Frequency the stapler has been activated
Punch
Frequency the punch has been activated
Stack*
Frequency the main tray eject has been activated
Saddle*
Frequency the center holding has been activated
Fold*
Frequency the middle folding has been activated
Three Fold*
Frequency the three folding has been activated
* : 4000-sheet document finisher only
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-48
3P2
Item No.
U942
Description
Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the document processor is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the
document processor is used.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Select the item to be adjusted.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys or numeric keys.l
Display
Description
Setting
range
Initial
Change in
setting value per step
Front
Deflection of single-sided original
-31 to 31
0
0.17mm
Mix
Deflection of mixed original
-31 to 31
0
0.17 mm
* : The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the
deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling
of original occurs, decrease the value.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U990
Checking the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays the accumulated time for the CIS to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the CIS.
Method
1. Press the start key.
The accumulated time for the CIS to light is displayed in minutes.
Display
CIS
Description
The accumulated time for the CIS to light
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-3-49
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-3-50
3P2
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection
1-4 Troubleshooting
(1) Original misfeed indication
When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine
operation panel.
To remove the jammed original, open the DP top cover or switchback unit.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off
and on.
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions
DPLS1
DPFS
DPSS
DPCS
DPOS DPLS2
DPES
DPTS
Figure 1-4-1
1-4-1
3P2
Code
Contents
Conditions
9000
No original feed
DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn on within specified time
during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).
9001
DP original conveying jam
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turns off within the specified time since
the sensor turns on.
9002
DP sensor stay jam
Sensor in the conveying system is on since original feeding
starts..
9005
No original feed 2
DP lift sensor 1 (DPLS1) does not turn on within specified time of
the lift board rising.
9008
No original feed 3
DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of
the paper feed starting.
9009
DP original conveying jam2 Next feed original became the stand-by states of paper feed
while reading the image.
9010
Document processor open
Document processor is opened during original feeding.
9011
DP top cover open
The DP top cover is opened during original feeding.
Original skew feed jam
DP ckew sensor (DPSS) does not turn on within specified time of
DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on.
9110
DP feed sensor stay jam
DP feed sensor (DPFS) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9300
DP CIS sensor non arrival
jam
DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn on within specified time of
DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning on.
9310
DP CIS sensor stay jam
DP CIS sensor (DPCS) does not turn off within specified time of
DP registration sensor (DPRS) turning off.
9400
DP timing sensor non
arrival jam
DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn on within specified time
during original feeding (Retry 5 times).
DP timing sensor stay jam
DP timing sensor (DPTS) does not turn off within specified time
of DP feed sensor (DPFS) turning off.
9600
DP eject sensor non arrival
jam
DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn on within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning on.
9610
DP eject sensor stay jam
DP eject sensor (DPES) does not turn off within specified time of
DP timing sensor (DPTS) turning off.
9020
9410
1-4-2
3P2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the
problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back
on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code
Contents
3210
CIS lamp error
When input value at the time of CIS
illumination does not exceed the
threshold value between 5 s.
3310
9000
Causes
Check procedures
corrective measures
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB
(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
Defective CIS.
Replace the CIS and check for correct
operation.
Defective DP
main PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check
for correct operation.
CIS AGC error
After AGC, correct input is not
obtained at CIS.
Defective CIS.
Replace the CIS and check for correct
operation.
Defective DP
main PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check
for correct operation.
Document processor communication error
Communication with the document
processor is not possible.
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
DP main PWB (YC1) and ISC PWB
(YC12)
ISC PWB (YC3) and main PWB (YC11)
Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB or the ISC
PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-3
3P2
Code
Contents
9040
DP lift motor ascending error
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP
lift sensor 1 does not turn on within
1500 pulse.
(Three recovery times.)
The above has been detected 5
times.
9050
9060
9070
9080
Causes
Check procedures
corrective measures
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
DP lift sensor 1 and DP main PWB
(YC4)
Defective DP lift
sensor 1.
Replace the DP lift sensor 1.
Defective DP lift
motor.
Replace the DP lift motor.
Defective DP
main PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check
for correct operation.
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
DP lift sensor 2 and DP main PWB
(YC2)
Defective DP lift
sensor 2.
Replace the DP lift sensor 2.
Defective DP lift
motor.
Replace the DP lift motor.
Defective DP
main PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check
for correct operation.
DP EEPROM error
Mismatch of reading data from two
locations occurs 3 times successively.
Mismatch between writing data and
reading data occurs 3 times successively.
Defective DP
main PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check
for correct operation.
Device damage
of EEPROM.
Contact the Service Administrative Division.
Communication error between DP
and SHD
A communication error is detected.
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
SHD PWB and DP main PWB (YC10)
Defective SHD
PWB.
Replace the SHD PWB and check for
correct operation.
Defective connector cable or
poor contact in
the connector.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for
continuity within the connector cable. If
none, replace the cable.
SHD PWB and DP main PWB (YC10)
Defective DP
CIS.
Replace the DP CIS.
Defective SHD
PWB.
Replace the SHD PWB and check for
correct operation.
DP lift motor descending error
When the DP lift motor is driven, DP
lift sensor 2 does not turn on within
1500 pulse.
(Three recovery times.)
The above has been detected 5
times.
LED fault detection
When the power supply is turned
on,the peak value of LED is 80hex or
less.
1-4-4
3P2
1-4-3 Electrical problems
Troubleshooting to each failure must be made in the order of the numbered symptoms.
Problem
(1)
The LED lamp
does not turn on
when an original is
present on the DP.
(2)
The size of the
original on the DP
is not displayed
correctly.
(3)
DP feed motor
does not operate.
Causes
Check procedures / corrective measures
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP original sensor and DP main PWB (YC2)
DP LED PWB and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
2. Defective sensor.
Replace the DP original sensor.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP LED PWB or DP main PWB and check for
correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP original width switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
DP original length switch and DP main PWB (YC2)
2. Defective switch.
Replace the DP original width switch or DP original length
switch.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP feed motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
(4)
DP regijstration
motor does not
operate.
3. Defective motor.
Replace the DP feed motor.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP registration motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor.
Replace the DP registration motor.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-5
3P2
Problem
(5)
DP conveying
motor does not
operate.
(6)
DP eject motor
does not operate.
Causes
Check procedures / corrective measures
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP conveying motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
2. Defective drive trans- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
mission system.
grease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
replace if any.
3. Defective motor.
Replace the DP conveying motor.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP eject motor and DP main PWB (YC14)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor congrease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
(7)
DP lift motor does
not operate.
3. Defective motor.
Replace the DP eject motor.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP lift motor and DP main PWB (YC5)
2. Defective connector Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not,
cable or poor congrease the bushes and gears. Check for broken gears and
tact in the connector. replace if any.
(8)
DP fan motor 1
does not operate.
(9)
DP fan motor 2
does not operate.
3. Defective motor
Replace the DP lift motor.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP fan motor 1 and DP main PWB (YC7)
2. Defective fan motor.
Replace the DP fan motor 1.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP fan motor 2 and DP main PWB (YC8)
2. Defective fan motor.
Replace the DP fan motor 2.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-6
3P2
Problem
(10)
An original jams
when the main
power switch is
turned on.
(11)
A message indicating the cover is
open is displayed
when the DP top
cover is closed.
(12)
The table is
scanned when DP
is closed and the
original is set.
(13)
The original is
plagiotropic.
Causes
Check procedures / corrective measures
1. A piece of paper torn
from an original is
caught around the
DP feed sensor, DP
CIS sensor, DP
timing sensor, DP
eject sensor.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
2. Defective sensor.
Replace the DP feed sensor, DP CIS sensor, DP timing
sensor or DP eject sensor.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP interlock switch and DP main PWB (YC6)
2. Defective switch.
Replace the DP interlock switch.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP open/close switch and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
2. Defective DP shutting.
Check the hinges and DP reading guide.
3. Defective switch.
Replace the DP open/close switch.
4. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1. Defective connector Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
cable or poor conconnector cable. If none, replace the cable.
tact in the connector. DP skew sensor and DP main PWB (YC4_B)
2. Defective switch.
Replace the DP skew sensor.
3. Defective PWB.
Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-7
3P2
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
Problem
(1)
No primary original
feed.
Causes / check procedures
Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
leys are dirty with paper powder.
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the following pulleys is
deformed.
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
(2)
Original is not correctly set.
Multiple sheets of orig- Check if the DP separation pulley is
inal are fed.
worn.
(3)
Originals jam.
Corrective measures
Originals being used do not conform with
the specifications.
Check visually and replace any
deformed (see page 1-5-2).
Set the original correctly.
Replace the DP separation pulley if it is
worn (see page 1-5-6).
Use only originals conforming to the
specifications.
Check if the surfaces of the following pul- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
leys are dirty with paper powder.
DP forwarding pulley
DP feed belt
Check if the contact between the DP reg- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
istration roller and DP registration pulley
is correct.
Check if the contact between the DP
upper conveying roller and DP conveying
pulley is correct.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check if the contact between the DP left
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check if the contact between the DP right
conveying roller and DP conveying pulley
is correct.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check if the contact between the DP
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
eject roller and DP eject pulley is correct.
1-4-8
3P2
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to turn power off. Make sure that the
Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug
the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the internal
hard disk.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible
to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to
the PARTS LIST.
1-5-1
3P2
1-5-2 Assembly and disassembly
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the DP original feed belt and DP forwarding pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove two screws from the DP feed
guide.
Screw
Screw
DP feed guide
Figure 1-5-1
3. Turns upward and then remove the DP
feed guide.
DP feed guide
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
3P2
4. Turns the DP feed unit upward.
DP feed unit
Figure 1-5-3
5. Remove the stop ring from front side of
the DP feed belt shaft A.
6. Pull forwards and then remove the DP
feed unit from the DP.
DP feed unit
Stop ring
DP feed belt shaft A
Figure 1-5-4
1-5-3
3P2
7. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed
belt shaft A.
8. Remove the stop ring and pulley from
the DP feed unit.
9. Slide the DP feed holder and then
remove the DP feed belt unit from the
DP feed unit.
DP feed unit
Pulley
Stop ring
DP feed belt
shaft A
Stop ring
DP feed belt unit
DP feed holder
Figure 1-5-5
10. Remove the DP feed holder A from the
DP feed belt shaft A.
11. Pull out the DP feed belt shaft A from
the DP feed belt unit and then remove
the DP feed collar A.
Drive belt
DP feed belt unit
Pullay
DP feed holder B
DP feed holder A
DP feed belt shaft A
DP feed collar A
Figure 1-5-6
1-5-4
3P2
12. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed
belt shaft B.
13. Pull out the DP feed belt shaft B from
the DP feed belt unit.
14. Remove the DP feed collar B and DP
feed belt from the DP feed belt shaft B.
DP feed belt shaft B
DP feed collar B
DP feed belt unit
Stop ring
DP feed belt
Figure 1-5-7
15. Remove the stop ring from the DP feed
belt shaft B.
16. Pull out the DP forwarding pulley shaft
from the DP feed unit and then remove
the DP forwarding pulley.
17. Check or replace the DP feed belt and
DP forwarding pulley and refit all the
removed parts.
Pulley
DP forwarding
pulley shaft
DP feed unit
DP forwarding pulley
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-5-8
1-5-5
3P2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the DP separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove the DP feed guide and DP
feed unit. (Seepage1-5-2)
3. Unhook the hook and then remove the
DP separation pulley cover.
DP top cover
DP separation pulley cover
Hook
Figure 1-5-9
4. Remove the stop ring and then remove
the DP separation pulley and torque
limiter.
5. Check or replace the DP separation
pulley and refit all the removed parts.
Stop ring
Torque limiter
DP separation
pulley
Figure 1-5-10
1-5-6
3P2
(3) Detaching and refitting the CIS
Follow the procedure below to replace the CIS.
Procedure
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Remove four screws from the upper
side and reverse side of DP.
3. Pull forwards and then remove the DP
front left cover and DP front cover.
DP top cover
Screw
DP front left cover
Screw
DP front cover
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-11
4. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-12
1-5-7
3P2
5. Remove two screws from the rear side
of machine and then remove the CIS
unit upwards.
Screw
Screw
CIS unit
Figure 1-5-13
Connector
6. Remove two connectors from the DP
SHD PWB.
Connector
DP SHD PWB
Figure 1-5-14
1-5-8
3P2
7. Remove the CIS front holder and CIS
rear holder and then remove the CIS slit
holder and the CIS upwards.
* : Makre sure that dusts and dirt do not
adhere to the CIS sensor when it is
exposed with the CIS slit glass
removed.
Dusts and dirt adhered to the sensor
can impair the scanning performance.
Marking (black)
CIS slit glass
CIS rear holder
CIS front holer
CIS
CIS guide
Figure 1-5-15
8. Remove six pins by using a flat screwdriver and then remove the DP SHD
PWB.
9. Check or replace the CIS and refit all
the removed parts.
* : Make sure to install the correct face
of the CIS slit glass as it is two-faced.
Observe the marking as shown.
Installing the CIS sensor with the
wrong face can impair the scanning
performance as paper dusts may
adhere to the sensor.
10. When the CIS is replaced with a new
one, carry out the following procedure.
11. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass
(CIS).
12. Perform maintenance mode U091 (setting the white line correction) (see page
1-3-26).
13. Make a test copy of a gray document.
If problems such as white lines appear
on the test copy, repeat the procedure
from steps 11 to 12 onwards until the
white lines no longer appear.
CIS guide
Flat screwdriver
DP SHD PWB
Pin
Figure 1-5-16
14. Perform maintenance mode U411
(Adjusting the scanner automatically)
(see page 1-3-36).
1-5-9
Pin
3P2
1-5-3 Image adjustment
(1) Adjusting the angle of leading edge
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of leading edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
3mm/4mm
Original
Copy
example 1
3mm/4mm
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-5-17
3. Loosen two screws of right and left fixing fittings.
Fixing fitting
Screw
Screw
Fixing fitting
Screw
Fixing fitting
Figure 1-5-18
1-5-10
3P2
4. Remove the left hinge cover.
5. Turn adjusting screw at the rear side of
the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example 1: Turn the adjusting
screw counterclockwise and move the
DP to the inner side.
For copy example 2: Turn the adjusting
screw clockwise and move the DP to
the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1
mm
6. Make a test copy.
7. Repeat the steps above until the gap of
the leading edge falls within the reference values.
8. After adjustment is completed, retighten
two screws that have been loosened in
step 3.
Right hinge cover
Adjusting screw
Figure 1-5-19
9. Remove the original mat.
10. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
11. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.
DP
Original mat
Original mat
Velcro
Figure 1-5-20
1-5-11
3P2
(2) Adjusting the angle of trailing edge
Perform the following adjustment if the trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed.
Procedure
1. Place an original on the DP and press
the start key to make a test copy.
2. If the gap of trailing edge exceeds the
reference value, perform the following
adjustment.
Reference value
For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
Original
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
Copy
Copy
example 1
example 2
Figure 1-5-21
3. Open the DP top cover.
4. Remove the right hinge cover.
5. Remove the screw and then remove the
left hinge cover.
DP top cover
Screw
Left hinge cover
Right hinge cover
Figure 1-5-22
1-5-12
3P2
6. Remove four screws and then remove
the DP rear cover.
Screw
DP rear cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
Figure 1-5-23
7. Adjust the height of DP.
Loosen the nut.
For copy example 1: Loosen the adjusting screw.
For copy example 2: Tighten the adjusting screw.
Amount of change per scale: Approx.
0.5 mm
Retighten the nut.
8. Refit the DP rear cover.
9. Refit the right hinge cover and left hinge
cover.
Adjusting screw
Nut
Scale
Figure 1-5-24
1-5-13
3P2
10. Remove the original mat.
11. Place original mat with its Velcro
upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat corner that has 90
degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
12. Close DP and attach original mat onto it
with Velcro.
DP
Original mat
Original mat
Velcro
Figure 1-5-25
13. Make a test copy again.
14. Repeat steps 1 to 12 above until the
gap of the trailing edge falls within the
reference values.
1-5-14
3P2
1-6-1 Remarks on DP main PWB replacement
1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement
(1) DP main PWB
When replacing the DP main PWB, remove the EEPROM (YS1) from the DP main PWB that has been
removed and then reattach it to the new DP main PWB.
EEPROM
YS1
Figure 1-6-1 DP main PWB
When the DP main PWB is replaced with a new one, carry out the following procedure.
1. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass (CIS).
2. Perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) (see page 1-3-36).
3. Perform maintenance mode U091 (setting the white line correction) (see page 1-3-26).
4. Make a test copy of a gray document.
If problems such as white lines appear on the test copy, repeat the procedure from steps 1 to 3
onwards until the white lines no longer appear.
(2) DP SHD PWB
When the DP SHD PWB is replaced with a new one, carry out the following procedure.
1. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass (CIS).
2. Perform maintenance mode U411 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) (see page 1-3-36).
3. Perform maintenance mode U091 (setting the white line correction) (see page 1-3-26).
4. Make a test copy of a gray document.
If problems such as white lines appear on the test copy, repeat the procedure from steps 1 to 3
onwards until the white lines no longer appear.
1-6-1
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-6-2
3P2
2-1-1 Original feed section
2-1 Mechanical Construction
The original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure. An original placed on the original table is conveyed to the original conveying section. Original is fed by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP original feed belt. The DP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque
limiter.
6
10 11
5
7
9 4
3
2
1
8
Figure 2-1-1 Original feed section
(1)Original tray
(2)DP original width switch (DPOWSW)
(3)Original lift guide
(4)DP forwarding pulley
(5)DP feed belt
(6)DP feed collar A
2-1-1
(7)DP feed collar B
(8)DP separation pulley
(9)DP original sensor (DPOS)
(10)DP feed sensor (DPFS)
(11)DP skew sensor (DPSS)
2-1-2
WIDE3,2,1
DPLS2
DPLM
DPMPWB
Figure 2-1-2 Original feed section block diagram
YC2-11,12,14
SET_SW
LF_UPSW
DPFS
YC2-6
YC4-A3
LF_DNSW
LIFT_2B,2A,1A,1B
SKEW_SW
DPSS
YC2-10
YC5-9,10,11,12
YC4-B13
FD_SW
FEED_2B,2A,1A,1B
DPOFM
YC4-A5
YC5-1,2,3,4
3P2
DPLS1
DPOS
DPOWSW
3P2
2-1-2 Original conveying section
The original conveying section consists of the parts shown in figure. A conveyed original is scanned by the
optical section (CCD) of machine when it passes through the slit glass of machine.
An original of which scanning is complete is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller.
2
4
5
6
1
3
13 15
7
8
10
9
17
11 12
14
Figure 2-1-3 Original conveying section
(10)DP conveying pulley
(11)DP right conveying roller
(12)DP conveying pulley
(13)DP eject sensor (DPES)
(14)DP eject roller
(15)DP eject pulley
(16)Slit glass (machine main body)
(17)Original eject table
(1)DP registration roller
(2)DP registration pulley
(3)DP upper conveying roller
(4)DP conveying pulley
(5)DP CIS sensor (DPCS)
(6)DP CIS roller
(7)CIS
(8)DP timing sensor (DPTS)
(9)DP left conveying roller
2-1-3
16
3P2
DPMPWB
RGST_2B,2A,1A,1B
DPRM
YC5-5,6,7,8
DPCS
CIS
CNVY_2B,2A,1B,1A
DPOCM
DPES
EXIT_SW
CCD_TMG_SW
YC2
CIS_TMG_SW
YC4-2
YC3
YC2
Image data
DPTS
DPSBM
DPSPWB
YC1
RVRS_1B,1A,2A,2B
Serial communication data signal
DPRPWB
Figure 2-1-4 Original conveying section block diagram
2-1-4
YC14-1,2,3,4
YC4-A12
YC4-B6
YC14-5,6,7,8
YC10
3P2
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
(1) PWBs
2
1
3
4
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) ................... Controls electrical components.
2. DP LED PWB (DPLPWB) ..................... Indicates presence of originals or an original jam.
3. DP SHD PWB (DPSPWB)....................... Controls the image processing.
4. DP relay PWB (DPRPWB) ...................... Relay of image data.
2-2-1
3P2
(2) Switches and sensors
4
8
9
10
3
6
2
7
5
12
11
1
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) ........ Detects the opening/closing of the DP.
2. DP interlock switch (DPILSW) .............. Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. DP original sensor (DPOS) ................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. DP lift sensor1 (DPLS1) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the upper limit.
5. DP lift sensor2 (DPLS2) ........................ Detects the original tray reaching the lower limit.
6. DP original length switch (DPOLSW).... Detects the length of the original.
7. DP original width switch (DPOWSW).... Detects the width of the original.
8. DP feed sensor (DPFS) ........................ Detects primary original feed end timing.
9. DP skew sensor (DPSS)....................... Detects the original conveying timing.
10. DP CIS sensor (DPCS)......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
11. DP timing sensor (DPTS)...................... Detects the original scanning timing.
12. DP eject sensor (DPES) ....................... Detects an original misfeed in the original eject section.
2-2-2
3P2
(3) Motors
2
6
1
7
5
3
4
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. DP feed motor (DPOFM) ...................... Drives the original feeding section.
2. DP ragistration motor (DPRM) .............. Drives the DP registration roller.
3. DP conveying motor (DPOCM)............. Drives the original conveying section.
4. DP eject motor (DPEM) ........................ Drives the DP eject roller.
5. DP lift motor (DPLM)............................. Operates the original lift guide.
6. DP fan motor1 (DPFM1) ....................... Cools the drive section.
7. DP fan motor2 (DPFM2) ....................... Cools the CIS.
2-2-3
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-4
3P2
2-3-1 DP main PWB
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
1
2
14 13
15
16
YC1
YC10
YS1
2
1
B13 A1
YC4
B1 A13
1
2
1
YC2
13
YC6
3
14
1
2
1
YC7
YC8
2
1
YC14
8 12
YC5
1
Figure 2-3-1 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-1
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
YC1
Connected to
ISCPWB.
Voltage
1
FG
2
ENG_PAGES
T
O
3.3 V DC
Pageset signal
3
ENG_RDY
O
3.3 V DC
Ready signal
4
ENG_SEL
I
3.3 V DC
Select signal
5
ENG_CLK
I
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
6
ENG_SI
I
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7
ENG_SO
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8
DP_OPEN
O
3.3 V DC
DPOCSW: On/Off
9
NC(GND)
-
-
Not used
10
GND
-
-
Ground
11
GND
-
-
Ground
12
GND
-
-
Ground
13
NC(GND)
-
-
Not used
14
24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
15
24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
16
24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from ISCPWB
YC2
1
3.3V
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPOLSW
Connected to
DP original
length switch,
DP original
sensor, DP lift
sensor 2, DP
original width
switch.
2
GND
-
-
Ground
3
LNG_SW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOLSW: On/Off
4
LNG_CLK
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
5
GND
-
-
Ground
6
SET_SW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOS: On/Off
7
3.3V
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPOS
8
ANODE
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPLS2
9
GND
-
-
Ground
10
LF_DNSW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPLS2: On/Off
11
WIDE3
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOWS: On/Off
12
WIDE2
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOWS: On/Off
13
GND
-
-
Ground
14
WIDE1
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOWS: On/Off
2-3-2
Description
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
Voltage
YC4_A
A1
ANODE
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPLS1
Connected to
DP lift sensor
1, DP feed
sensor, DP
eject sensor.
A2
GND
-
-
Ground
A3
LF_UPSW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPLS1: On/Off
A4
GND
-
-
Ground
A5
FD_SW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPFS: On/Off
A6
3.3V
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPFS
A7
NC
-
-
Not used
A8
NC
-
-
Not used
A9
NC
-
-
Not used
A10 ANODE
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPES
A11 GND
-
-
Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M)
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPES: On/Off
A13 NC
-
-
Not used
YC4_B
B1
NC
-
-
Not used
Connected to
DPLED PWB,
DP timing
sensor, DP
open/close
switch, DP
skew sensor.
B2
LED_PW
O
5.6 V DC
5.6 V DC power output to LEDPWB
B3
LED_REM
O
0/5.6 V DC
LED control signal
B4
NC(GND)
-
-
Not used
B5
GND
-
-
Ground
B6
CCD_TMG_S
W
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPTS: On/Off
B7
3.3V
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPTS
B8
ANODE
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPOCSW
B9
GND
-
-
Ground
B10 DP_OPEN
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPOCSW: On/Off
B11 ANODE
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPSS
B12 GND
-
-
Ground
B13 SKEW_SW
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPSS: On/Off
2-3-3
Description
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
1
FEED3_OUT
2B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
2
FEED1_OUT
2A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
3
FEED2_OUT
1A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
4
FEED4_OUT
1B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOFM drive control signal
5
RGST3_OUT
2B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
6
RGST1_OUT
2A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
7
RGST2_OUT
1A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
8
RGST4_OUT
1B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPRM drive control signal
9
LIFT3_OUT2
B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
10
LIFT1_OUT2
A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
11
LIFT2_OUT1
A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
12
LIFT4_OUT1
B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPLM drive control signal
YC6
1
24V
O
24 V DC
24 V DC power output to DPILSW
Connected to
DP interlock
switch.
2
NC
-
-
Not used
3
R24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from DPILSW
YC7
1
R24V
O
24 V DC
24 V DC power output to DPFM1
Connected to
DP fan
motor1.
2
FAN_REM1
O
0/24 V DC
DPFM1: On/Off
YC8
1
R24V
O
24 V DC
24 V DC power output to DPFM2
Connected to
DP fan
motor2.
2
FAN_REM2
O
0/24 V DC
DPFM2: On/Off
YC5
Connected to
DP feed
motor, DP
registration
motor, DP lift
motor.
Voltage
2-3-4
Description
3P2
Connector
Pin
YC10
1
CIS_TMG_S
W
I
0/3.3 V DC
Connected to
DP SHD
PWB.
2
SHD_CLK
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
3
SHD_SO
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
4
SHD_SEL
O
0/3.3 V DC
Select signal
5
SHD_PAGES
T
O
0/3.3 V DC
Pageset signal
6
RESETN
O
0/3.3 V DC
Reset signal
7
SHD_OVMO
N
I
0/3.3 V DC
OVMON signal
8
SHD_SI
I
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
9
SHD_RDY
I
0/3.3 V DC
Ready signal
10
NC
-
-
Not used
11
24V
O
24 V DC
24 V DC power output to SHDPWB
12
24V
O
24 V DC
24 V DC power output to SHDRWB
13
GND
-
-
Ground
14
GND
-
-
Ground
1
CNVY4_OUT
2B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
2
CNVY3_OUT
2A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
3
CNVY2_OUT
1B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
4
CNVY1_OUT
1A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPOCM drive control signal
5
RVRS4_OUT
1B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
6
RVRS2_OUT
1A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
7
RVRS1_OUT
2A
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
8
RVRS3_OUT
2B
O
0/24 V DC (pulse) DPEM drive control signal
YC14
DP conveying motor, DP
eject motor.
Signal
I/O
Voltage
2-3-5
Description
DPCS: On/Off
3P2
2-3-2 DP SHD PWB
[ Component side ]
[ Solder side ]
A40
B40
YC2
A1
B1
1
2
1
YC4
3
YC1
14 13
7
YC3
1
Figure 2-3-2 DP SHD PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-6
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
Voltage
YC1
1
GND
-
-
Ground
Connected to
DP main
PWB.
2
GND
-
-
Ground
3
24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from DPMPWB
4
24V
I
24 V DC
24 V DC power input from DPMPWB
5
NC
-
-
Not used
6
CPU_SRDY
O
0/3.3 V DC
Ready signal
7
CPU_SO
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
8
CPU_OVM
O
0/3.3 V DC
OVM signal
9
RESETN
I
0/3.3 V DC
Reset signal
10
CPU_PAGES
T
I
0/3.3 V DC
Pageset signal
11
CPU_SEL
I
0/3.3 V DC
Select signal
12
CPU_SI
I
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
13
CPU_SCLK
I
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
14
CIS_TMG_S
W
O
0/3.3 V DC
DPCS: On/Off
YC2
A1
GND
-
-
Ground
Connected to
CIS.
A2
CK1
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Clock signal
A3
GND
-
-
Ground
A4
ST1
O
0/3.3 V DC
ST1 signal
A5
GND
-
-
Ground
A6
MODE
O
0/3.3 V DC
MODE signal
A7
GND
-
-
Ground
A8
VREF
O
0/1.1 V DC
1.1 V DC power output to VREF
A9
GND
-
-
Ground
A10 GND
-
-
Ground
A11 GND
-
-
Ground
A12 LED4R_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A13 LED4G_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A14 LED4B_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A15 LED4_A
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A16 LED1_A
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A17 LED1R_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A18 LED1G_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A19 LED1B_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A20 LED2R_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
2-3-7
Description
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
Voltage
YC2
A21 LED2G_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
Connected to
CIS.
A22 LED2B_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A23 LED2_A
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A24 LED3_A
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A25 LED3R_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A26 LED3G_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A27 LED3B_C
O
0/6 V DC
LED control signal
A28 GND
-
-
Ground
A29 GND
-
-
Ground
A30 GND
-
-
Ground
A31 GND
-
-
Ground
A32 GND
-
-
Ground
A33 GND
-
-
Ground
A34 GND
-
-
Ground
A35 GND
-
-
Ground
A36 GND
-
-
Ground
A37 3.3V_CIS
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to CIS
A38 3.3V_CIS
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to CIS
A39 3.3V_CIS
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to CIS
A40 GND
-
-
Ground
B1
GND
-
-
Ground
B2
GND
-
-
Ground
B3
OS_1
I
Analog
Data signal
B4
GND
-
-
Ground
B5
OS2
I
Analog
Data signal
B6
GND
-
-
Ground
B7
OS3
I
Analog
Data signal
B8
GND
-
-
Ground
B9
OS4
I
Analog
Data signal
B10 GND
-
-
Ground
B11 OS5
I
Analog
Data signal
B12 GND
-
-
Ground
B13 OS6
I
Analog
Data signal
B14 GND
-
-
Ground
B15 OS7
I
Analog
Data signal
B16 GND
-
-
Ground
B17 OS8
I
Analog
Data signal
2-3-8
Description
3P2
Connector
Pin
Signal
I/O
Voltage
Description
YC2
B18 GND
-
-
Ground
Connected to
CIS.
B19 OS9
I
Analog
Data signal
B20 GND
-
-
Ground
B21 OS10
I
Analog
Data signal
B22 GND
-
-
Ground
B23 OS11
I
Analog
Data signal
B24 GND
-
-
Ground
B25 OS12
I
Analog
Data signal
B26 GND
-
-
Ground
B27 OS13
I
Analog
Data signal
B28 GND
-
-
Ground
B29 OS14
I
Analog
Data signal
B30 GND
-
-
Ground
B31 OS15
I
Analog
Data signal
B32 GND
-
-
Ground
B33 OS16
I
Analog
Data signal
B34 GND
-
-
Ground
B35 OS17
I
Analog
Data signal
B36 GND
-
-
Ground
B37 OS18
I
Analog
Data signal
B38 GND
-
-
Ground
B39 GND
-
-
Ground
B40 GND
-
-
Ground
YC3
1
GND
-
-
Ground
Connected to
DP relay
PWB.
2
HTPDN
I
0/3.3 V DC
HTPDN signal
3
LOCKN
I
0/3.3 V DC
LOCKN signal
4
GND
-
-
Ground
5
TX0N
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
6
TX0P
O
0/3.3 V DC(pulse) Serial communication data signal
7
GND
-
-
Ground
YC4
1
GND
-
-
Ground
Connected to
DP CIS sensor.
2
CIS_TMG_S
W
I
0/3.3 V DC
DPCS: On/Off
3
3.3V
O
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC power output to DPCS
2-3-9
3P2
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-3-10
3P2
2-4-1 Appendixes
2-4 Appendixes
(1) List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name
Name used in service manual
Name used in parts list
Part No.
Alternative
part No.
DP paper feed belt
BELT PF
303LL07531
3LL07531
DP forwarding pulley
PULLEY LF
303M407480
3M407480
DP separation pulley
PULLEY SEPARATION
303LL07190
3LL07190
DP original sensor
PARATS SENSOR OPT. SP
303NW94040
3NW94040
DP registration roller
PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION
SP
303M494070
3M494070
DP registration pulley
PULLEY,REGISTRATION BK
303M424300
3M424300
DP registration pulley
PULLEY REG B BK
303M424310
3M424310
DP conveying roller left
PARATS ROLLER CONVEING LEFT
303M494090
3M494090
Reading pulley
PULLEY GUIDE READING
303LL24190
3LL24190
DP conveying roller right
PARATS ROLLER CONVEING
RIGHT SP
PARATS ROLLER CONVEING
UPPER SP
303M494100
3M494100
303M494080
3M494080
DP conveying roller upper
DP eject roller
PARTS ROLLER EJECT SP
303M494110
3M494110
Reading guide
GUIDE READING
303M424251
3M424251
DP CIS sensor
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP
303NW94060
3NW94060
DP timing sensor
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP
303NW94060
3NW94060
DP eject sensor
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP
303NW94060
3NW94060
DP CIS roller
PARTS ROLLER CIS SP
303M494060
3M494060
CIS
PARTS SENSER A3 COLOR CIS(C)
SP
303M494050
3M494050
DP original length switch
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP
303NW94050
3NW94050
Original mat
PARTS MAT ASSY
303LL94031
3LL94031
2-4-1
3P2
(2) Periodic maintenance procedures
Section
Maintenance
part/location
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
Test copy
and test
Perform at the maximum copy size
Test
copy
Test
copy
Section
Maintenance
part/location
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
DP paper feed belt
Clean
Replace
Clean with alcohol.
P.1-5-2
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP forwarding pulley
Clean
Replace
Clean with alcohol.
P.1-5-2
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP separation pulley
Clean
Replace
Clean with alcohol.
P.1-5-6
Replace after feeding 300,000 sheets.
DP original sensor
Clean
Clean
Maintenance
part/location
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
DP registration roller
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP registration pulley
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP registration pulley
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP conveying roller
left
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Reading pulley
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP conveying roller
right
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Original
feed section
Section
Original
conveying section
2-4-2
Points and cautions
Page
Points and cautions
Page
Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
Points and cautions
Page
3P2
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
DP conveying roller
upper
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP eject roller
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Reading guide
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
DP CIS sensor
Clean
Clean
Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
DP timing sensor
Clean
Clean
Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
DP eject sensor
Clean
Clean
Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
DP CIS roller
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
CIS
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
Maintenance
part/location
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
DP original length
switch
Clean
Clean
Maintenance
part/location
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
Covers
Clean
Clean
Clean with alcohol.
Original mat
Clean
Clean
Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol.
User
call
300K/600K/
900K/1200K/
1500K
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Original
conveying section
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Cis
Section
Original
table
Section
Covers
Section
Other
Maintenance
part/location
Image quality
Check
Adjust
Check Adjust
2-4-3
Points and cautions
Points and cautions
Points and cautions
Page
Page
Page
Air blow or clean with a dry cloth.
Points and cautions
Points and cautions
Page
Page
2-4-4
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
GND
FD_SW
3.3V
ANODE
GND
EXIT_SW
LED_PW
LED_REM
GND
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
ANODE
GND
DP_OPEN
ANODE
GND
SKEW_SW
COM
NO
DPFS
DPES
DPLPWB
DPTS
DPOCSW
DPSS
DPILSW
2
1
2
1
DPFM1
DPFM2
1
2
3
2
1
ANODE
GND
LF_UPSW
DPLS1
Relay
Relay
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
GND
DP_PAGEST
DP_RDY
DP_SEL
DP_CLK
DP_SO
DP_SI
DP_OPEN
RESERVE
GND
GND
GND
RESERVE
24V
24V
24V
YC12
ISCPWB
1
2
1
2
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
2
1
6
5
4
2
1
9
8
7
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24V
NC
R24V
R24V
FAN_REM2
YC8
R24V
FAN_REM1
YC7
YC6
NC
LED_PW
LED_REM
GND
GND
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
ANODE
GND
DP_OPEN
ANODE
GND
SKEW_SW
YC4_B
ANODE
GND
LF_UPSW
GND
FD_SW
3.3V
NC
NC
NC
ANODE
GND
EXIT_SW
NC
YC4_A
FG
ENG_PAGEST
ENG_RDY
ENG_SEL
ENG_CLK
ENG_SI
ENG_SO
DP_OPEN
NC(GND)
GND
GND
GND
NC(GND)
24V
24V
24V
YC1
DPMPWB
YC10
CNVY4_OUT2B
CNVY3_OUT2A
CNVY2_OUT1B
CNVY1_OUT1A
RVRS4_OUT1B
RVRS2_OUT1A
RVRS1_OUT2A
RVRS3_OUT2B
YC14
FEED3_OUT2B
FEED1_OUT2A
FEED2_OUT1A
FEED4_OUT1B
RGST3_OUT2B
RGST1_OUT2A
RGST2_OUT1A
RGST4_OUT1B
LIFT3_OUT2B
LIFT1_OUT2A
LIFT2_OUT1A
LIFT4_OUT1B
YC5
3.3V
GND
LNG_SW
LNG_CLK
GND
SET_SW
3.3V
ANODE
GND
LF_DNSW
WIDE3
WIDE2
GND
WIDE1
YC2
CIS_TMG_SW
SHD_CLK
SHD_SO
SHD_SEL
SHD_PAGEST
RESETN
SHD_OVMON
SHD_SI
SHD_RDY
NC
24V
24V
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
2
1
3
4
2
1
3
1
2
4
5
3
6
1
2
4
5
3
6
2
6
4
3
1
5
2
6
4
1
3
5
2
6
4
1
3
5
2
6
4
3
1
5
2
6
4
1
3
5
4
3
2
1
2
6
4
1
3
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
DPCS
DPRPWB
YC2
NC
A/
A
B
B/
NC
NC
B/
B
A/
A
NC
B3
B1
A1
A3
NC
B/
B
A
A/
NC
NC
B/
B
A
A/
NC
WIDE3
WIDE2
GND
WIDE1
ANODE
GND
LF_DNSW
GND
SET_SW
3.3V
3.3V
GND
LNG_SW
LNG_CLK
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DPSBM
DPOCM
DPLM
DPRM
DPOFM
DPOWSW
DPLS2
DPOS
DPOLSW
3.3V
CIS_TMG_SW
GND
GND
HTPDN
LOCKN
GND
Rx0N
Rx0P
GND
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
YC1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3.3V
CIS_TMG_SW
GND
YC4
GND
HTPDN
LOCKN
GND
Tx0N
Tx0P
GND
YC3
14 CIS_TMG_SW
13 CPU_SCLK
CPU_SI
12
CPU_SEL
11
10 CPU_PAGEST
RESETN
9
CPU_OVM
8
CPU_SO
7
CPU_SRDY
6
NC
5
24V
4
24V
3
2
GND
GND
1
GND
CK1
GND
ST1
GND
MODE
GND
VREF
GND
GND
GND
LED4R_C
LED4G_C
LED4B_C
LED4_A
LED1_A
LED1R_C
LED1G_C
LED1B_C
LED2R_C
LED2G_C
LED2B_C
LED2_A
LED3_A
LED3R_C
LED3G_C
LED3B_C
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
3.3V_CIS
3.3V_CIS
3.3V_CIS
GND
GND
GND
OS_1
GND
OS2
GND
OS3
GND
OS4
GND
OS5
GND
OS6
GND
OS7
GND
OS8
GND
OS9
GND
OS10
GND
OS11
GND
OS12
GND
OS13
GND
OS14
GND
OS15
GND
OS16
GND
OS17
GND
OS18
GND
GND
GND
YC2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
DPSPWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
GND
CK
GND
SP
GND
MODE
GND
VREF
GND
GND
GND
LED4_R
LED4_G
LED4_B
VLED4
VLED1
LED1_R
LED1_G
LED1_B
LED2_R
LED2_G
LED2_B
VLED2
VLED3
LED3_R
LED3_G
LED3_B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
OS1
GND
OS2
GND
OS3
GND
OS4
GND
OS5
GND
OS6
GND
OS7
GND
OS8
GND
OS9
GND
OS10
GND
OS11
GND
OS12
GND
OS13
GND
OS14
GND
OS15
GND
OS16
GND
OS17
GND
OS18
GND
GND
GND
CISPWB
3P2
(3) Wiring diagram
1-1 INSTALLATION GUIDE
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
B
A
CODE No.
1102L6
1102N4
1102N5
1102N6
1102N9
1102NA
1102NB
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
English
Français
1.
Français
1.
Español
1.
Deutsch
Deutsch
1.
Italiano
Italiano
CODE No.
1102NL
1102P8
****
****
CODE No.
1102NP
****
Check “CODE No.” printed in the rating label.
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
For installation with a MFP(A), see Page 1 to Page 12,Page 28 to Page 46.
For installation with a MFP(B), see Page 13 to Page 46.
Cochez la case "CODE No." imprimé sur l'étiquette signalétique.
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(A), voir Page 1 à Page 12,Page 28 à Page 46.
Pour l'installation avec une imprimante multifonction(B), voir Page 13 à Page 46.
Revise "CODE No." impreso en la etiqueta de clasificación.
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un MFP(A), consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 12,páginas de la 28 a la 46.
Para la instalación con un MFP(B), consulte las páginas de la 13 a la 46.
Prüfen Sie „Code No.“ auf dem Typenschild.
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(A) siehe Seiten 1 bis 12,Seiten 28 bis 46.
Bei Installation an einem MFP(B) siehe Seiten 13 bis 46.
Controllare "CODE No." stampato sull' etichetta.
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(A), vedere le pagine da 1 a 12,pagine da 28 a 46.
Per l'installazione con un MFP(B), vedere le pagine da 13 a 46.
简体中文
1.
请确认印制在铭牌上的 “ 产品编号 ”。
根据安装对象,安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到 MFP(A) 上时,请参见 P1-P12,P28-P46。
安装到 MFP(B) 上时,请参见 P13-P46。
1.한국어
래이팅 라벨에 인쇄된 'CODE No.' 을 확인하십시오 .
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
MFP(A) 에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~12 페이지 ,28 페이지 ~46 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
MFP(B) 에 설치하는 경우 13 페이지 ~46 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
1.日本語
定格板に印字されている ’CODE No.’ を確認してください。
装着する対象によって、
取付手順は異なります。
それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
MFP(A) に設置する場合;1 ページ~ 12 ページ、
28 ページ~ 46 ページ
MFP(B) に設置する場合;13 ページ~ 46 ページ
F
B
A
DP-772
K*
G(M4x14)(8)
C*
E-1
D
M
C
A
English
Supplied parts
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ..........2 (DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1
Français
Pièces fournies
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Plaque d’original .................................................. 1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm).................. 2 (DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1
Español
Partes suministradas
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1
C. Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38,5 mm)
.........................................................2 (DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm)
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm)
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
K**
J(M3x8)
E-2
H
D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1
E-1.DP cable cover1 ................................................. 1
E-2.DP cable cover2 ................................................. 1
F. Pin ........................................................................ 1
G. M4 × 14TP screw ................................................. 8
H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1
I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1
D. Fixation d’angle .................................................... 1
E-1.Couvercle du câble du DP1................................ 1
E-2.Couvercle du câble du DP2................................ 1
F. Goupille ................................................................ 1
G. Vis TP M4 × 14..................................................... 8
H. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 ......................... 1
I. Couvercle de charnière droite*1 ............................ 1
J. Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1
C*.Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1
D. Herraje de control de ángulo................................ 1
E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1................................. 1
E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2................................. 1
F. Pasador................................................................ 1
G. Tornillo TP M4 × 14 .............................................. 8
H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1
I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1
C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1
E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1......................................... 1
E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2......................................... 1
F. Stift ....................................................................... 1
G. M4 × 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8
H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1
I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1
C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1
E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1..................................... 1
E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2..................................... 1
F. Perno.................................................................... 1
G. Vite M4 × 14TP .................................................... 8
H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1
I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1
N(M3x8)
L
I
J. M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1
K. Label “Operation procedure” ................................1
*: for metric specification
**: for inch specification
L. Caution label “Original face up!”...........................1
M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
N. M3 × 8 screw*1 ...................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 only
K. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ 1
* : pour des spécifications métriques
** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes
L. Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation
vers le haut de la face de l’original ......................1
M. Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 .................1
N. Vis M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 uniquement
J. Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1
K. Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” ..................... 1
*: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico
**: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
L. Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” ......1
M. PWB del relé del DP*1...........................................1
N. Tornillo M3 × 8*1 .................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 solamente
J. M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1
K. Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ..............................1
*: für metrische Angaben
**: für Angaben in Zoll
L. Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ........ 1
M. DP-Verbindungsplatine *1 ..................................... 1
N. M3 × 8 Schraube*1 ................................................2
*1: nur DP-772
J. Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1
K. Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” ..............1
*: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico
**: per specifiche in pollici
L. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ... 1
M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
N. Vite M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
*1: Solo DP-772
C*.固定工具 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ..................1
D. 角度限制工具 .........................1
E-1.DP 电缆盖板 1 ....................... 1
E-2.DP 电缆盖板 2 ....................... 1
F. 销 ...................................1
G. M4×14TP 螺丝 .........................8
H. 左部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1
I. 右部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1
J. M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 .....................1
M. DP 中继板 *1 ...........................1
N. M3×8 螺丝 *1 ..........................2
*1: 仅限 DP-772
(K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。
I. 힌지커버 우 *1 ......................................... 1
J. 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ................................ 1
M. DP 중계기판 *1 ....................................... 1
N. 나사 M3×8*1 .......................................... 2
1(DP-772)
C*.고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ................................1
D. 각도 고정쇠 ........................................... 1
E-1.DP 케이블커버 1................................... 1
E-2.DP 케이블커버 2................................... 1
F. 핀 ........................................................ 1
G. 나사 M4×14TP ...................................... 8
H. 힌지커버 좌 *1 ..........................................1
同梱品
A. DP.................................. 1
B. 原稿マット........................... 1
C. 固定金具 (38.5mm 幅 ) ...... 2(DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
C*.固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ...................1
D. 角度規制金具 ........................ 1
E-1.DP ケーブルカバー1 .................. 1
E-2.DP ケーブルカバー2 .................. 1
F. ピン ................................ 1
G. ビス M4×14TP ........................ 8
H. 左ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1
简体中文
附属品
A. DP................................... 1
B. 原稿垫............................... 1
C. 固定工具 ( 宽 38.5mm) ...... 2(DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
한국어
동봉품
A. DP........................................................ 1
B. 원고매트................................................ 1
C. 고정쇠 (38.5mm 폭 ) .............. 2(DP-770(B))
日本語
*1: DP-772 만
(K)(L)는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .
I. 右ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1
J. ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ......................1
M. DP 中継基板 *1 ........................ 1
N. ビス M3×8*1 .......................... 2
*1:DP-772 のみ
(K)(L) は、
同梱されていない。
1
G(M4x14)
A
C
G(M4x14)
C
2
2
1
1
NOTICE
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.
The illustrations of the DP in the Installation
Guide are for DP-772.
Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-770(B))
1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fixing fittings (C) into the MFP.
2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).
REMARQUE
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
pièces fournies.
Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation
concernent le DP-772.
Procédure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-770(B))
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le
MFP.
2.Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).
AVISO
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de instalación corresponden al DP-772.
Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-770(B))
1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP.
2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación
(C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).
ANMERKUNG
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.
Die Abbildungen des DP in der
Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-772.
Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida
all’installazione sono per il modello DP-772.
Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP770(B))
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
(C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
den MFP einsetzen.
2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP770(B))
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP, ed
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
nell’MFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
注意
如果附属品上带有固定胶带,缓冲材料时务必揭
下。
安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-772 为例。
安装步骤
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关,并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
安装固定工具(DP-770(B))
1.将各固定工具(C)上的突出部分(1)与 MFP
上的孔(2)对齐,然后将固定工具(C)插入
MFP 中。
2.用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)固定各固定工具
(C)。
주의
동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 일러스트는 DP772 입니다 .
설치순서
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
고정쇠의 부착(DP-770(B))
1.고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 의 구멍 (2)
을 맞추고 MFP 에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂습니다 .
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠
(C) 를 고정합니다 .
注意
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
は必ず取り外すこと。
設置手順書に記載している DP のイラストは、
DP-772 です。
取付手順
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
固定金具の取り付け(DP-770(B))
1.固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) を
合わせ、MFP に固定金具 (C) を差し込む。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具
(C) を固定する。
2
G(M4x14)
C*
G(M4x14)
C
A
G(M4x14)
F
G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A
2
C
4
2
1
1
A
C (C*)
3
5
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-772)
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fitting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*)
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP.
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*)
with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Install the DP
3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of
fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fittings (C).
5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
(F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-772)
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C)
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et
insérer les fixations dans le MFP.
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2
vis TP M4 × 14 (G).
Installer le DP
3.Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A)
sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer
le DP (A) sur le MFP.
4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
engager les charnières dans les crochets (5)
sur les pièces de fixation (C).
5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à
l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
M4 × 14 (G).
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-772)
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación derecho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
del MFP y, después, inserte los herrajes de fijación
en el MFP.
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C)
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G).
Instale el DP
3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A)
con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los herrajes de fijación (C).
5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14
(G).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-772)
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalterung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen in den MFP einsetzen.
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4
× 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Installieren des DP
3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Befestigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.
5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
× 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-772)
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag-
Montaggio del DP
3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A)
con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio
(C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP.
4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
accessori di fissaggio (C).
5.Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo
con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
安装 DP
3.将 DP(A)的铰链孔(3)对准固定工具(C)的
销(4),并将 DP(A)放在 MFP 上。
4.朝前侧滑动 DP(A),然后将铰链与固定工具
(C)上的卡扣(5)相啮合。
5.用销(F)和两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)将 DP
(A)安装到 MFP 上。
고정쇠의 부착(DP-772)
1.우측에 고정쇠 (C), 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*)
각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고
MFP 에 꽂습니다 .
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와
고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 .
DP 부착
3.DP(A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀
(4) 을 맞추고 MFP 에 DP(A) 를 올립니다 .
4.DP(A) 를 밀어 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠
(5) 에 끼웁니다 .
5.핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로
DP(A) 를 MFP 에 고정합니다 .
固定金具の取り付け(DP-772)
1.右側に固定金具 (C)、
左側に幅広の固定金具
(C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2)
を合わせ、MFP に差し込む。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と
固定金具 (C*) を固定する。
DP の取り付け
3.DP(A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C)
のピン (4) を合わせ、MFP に DP(A) を乗せ
る。
4.DP(A) を手前にスライドさせ、ヒンジ部を固
定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ込む。
5.ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で
DP(A) を MFP に固定する。
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro
più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G).
安装固定工具 (DP-772)
1.将固定工具 (C) 从右侧、宽幅固定夹具 (C*)
从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 的孔
(2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 中。
2.使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定工
具 (C) 与固定工具 (C*)
3
A
A
6
8
12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D
D
10
7
Install the angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side
of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws
(G).
To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees
7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A).
8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8).
Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A).
9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
(D) that has been installed in step 6 to
remove shaft (12).
Installer la fixation d’angle
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture
du DP de 60 degrés
6.Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la
charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4
× 14 (G).
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture
du DP de 30 degrés
7.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A).
8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10).Retirer
la couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A).
9.Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation
d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever
la tige (12).
Instale el herraje de control de ángulo
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60
grados
6.Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con
dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G).
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30
grados
7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).
9.Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje
de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el
paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 60 Grad
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 ×
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 30 Grad
7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen.
8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
(8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hinteren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).
9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 montiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione
angolare
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura
del DP a 60 gradi
6.Montare l’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera
destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura
del DP a 30 gradi
7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A).
8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la
cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
(10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
del DP (A).
9.Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11)
dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
rimuovere l’albero (12).
安装角度限制工具
若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度
6.在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝
(G)安装角度限制工具(D)。
若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度
7.打开 DP(A)的上盖板(6)。
8.取下 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8)。从后盖板 (10) 上取
下塑料片 (9)。取下 DP(A) 的后盖板 (10)。
9.拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件(D)的
止动环(11),以将轴(12)拆下。
각도 고정쇠의 부착
DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우
6.우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로
각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 .
DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우
7.DP(A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 .
8.나사 (7), (8) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 스트랩 (9)
를 후면 커버 (10) 에서 제거합니다 .DP(A)
의 후면 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .
9.스텝 6 에서 부착한 각도 고정쇠 (D) 의 스톱
링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 샤프트 (12) 를 제
거합니다 .
角度規制金具の取り付け
DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合
6.右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度
規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。
DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合
7.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。
8.ビス (7)、(8) 4 本を外す。
ストラップ (9) を
後カバー(10) から外す。
DP(A) の後カバー
(10) を取り外す。
9.手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス
トップリング (11)1 個を外し、シャフト
(12) を取り外す。
4
A
14
11
12
12
15
14
13
Connect the DP signal line (DP-770(B) only)
For the DP-772, proceed to step 13 on page 7.
13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP
cable connection cover (14).
14.Remove the DP cable connection cap (15)
from the DP cable connection cover (14).
10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP770(B) uniquement)
Pour le DP-772, passer à l'étape 13 en page 7.
13.Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle
de la connexion du câble du DP (14).
14.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
câble du DP (15) du couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (14).
10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bis-
Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP770(B) solamente)
Para el DP-772, vaya al paso 13 de la página 7.
13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de
conexión del cable del DP (14).
14.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
(15) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
DP (14)
Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur
DP-770(B))
Beim DP-772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf
Seite 7.
13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die
Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
abnehmen.
14.Die Kappe (15) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
von der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP770(B))
Per il DP-772, procedere al passo 13 a pagina
7.
13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(14).
14.Rimuovere il cappuccio (15) per la connessione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14).
10.将轴(12)插入到右部铰链的后部。
11.将止动环(11)安装到轴(12)的切口并将轴
(12)固定。
12.使用步骤 8 中取下的 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8) 来按
原样安装后盖板 (10)。把塑料片 (9) 安装到
后盖板 (10)。关闭 DP(A) 的 DP 上盖板 (6)。
连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-770(B))
DP-772 跳至 P7 的步骤 13。
13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板
(14)。
14.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接
用盖 (15)。
10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 샤프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 .
11. 스톱링 (11) 을 샤프트 (12) 의 노치에 부착하고
DP 신호선의 접속(DP-770(B) 만)
DP-772 은 P7 의 순서 13 으로 진행 .
13.나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 연결 커버
(14) 를 제거합니다 .
14.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (14) 에서 DP 케이블
연결 캡 (15) 을 제거합니다 .
DP 信号線の接続(DP-770(B) のみ)
DP-772 は P7 の手順 13 へ進む。
13.ビス (13)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ
バー(14) を外す。
14.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) から DP ケーブ
ル接続用フタ (15) を取り外す。
10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right
hinge.
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12)
and secure shaft (12).
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four
screws (7) and (8) removed in step 8.Attach the
strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper
cover (6) of the DP (A).
droite.
11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la
tige (12) et mettre en place la tige (12).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrière (10) à l'aide des
quatre vis (7) et (8) retirées à l'étape 8.Fixer la
courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrière
(10).Refermer le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP
(A).
agra derecha.
11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del
eje (12) y asegure el eje (12).
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con
los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8) que quitó en el paso
8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers
einsetzen.
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbringen und Welle befestigen (12).
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an.
Benutzen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und (8) aus
Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hinteren Abdeckung (10).Schließen Sie die obere
Abdeckung (6) des DP (A).
10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della
cerniera destra.
11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo
dell’albero (12) e assicurare l’albero (12).
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando
le quattro viti (7) e (8) rimosse al punto 8.Rimontare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A).
샤프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 .
12. 순서 8 에서 제거한 나사 (7),(8) 4 개를 사용하
여 후면 커버 (10) 를 원래대로 부착합니다 . 스
트랩 (9) 을 후면 커버 (10) 에 부착합니다
.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (6) 를 닫습니다 .
10.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。
11.ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝
に取り付け、
シャフト (12) を固定する。
12.手順 8 で外したビス (7)、(8) 4 本で後カ
バー(10) を元通り取り付ける。
ストラップ
(9) を後カバー(10) に取り付ける。DP(A) の
DP 上カバー(6) を閉じる。
5
A
16
E-2
14
E
14
E-1
18
16
13
17
14
15.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) through
the hole in DP cable connection cover (14).
Connect the DP signal line connector (17) to
the connector (18) of the ISC PWB.
16.Pass the DP signal line cable (16) along the
groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1). Install
the DP cable cover 2 (E-2).
17.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
cable connection cover (14) and install the
DP cable connection cover (14) using the
screw (13) removed in step 13.
Proceed to step 23 on page 10
15.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16)
dans le trou du couvercle de connexion du
câble DP (14).Raccordez le connecteur de
ligne de signal DP (17) sur le connecteur
(18) de l'ISC PWB.
16.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (16)
dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP
(E-1). Installez le couvercle 2 du câble DP
(E-2).
17.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le
couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP
(14) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
du câble du DP (14) à l'aide de la vis (13)
déposée à l'étape 13.
Passer à l'étape 23 de la page 10.
15.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP
(16) por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión
de cables del DP (14).Conecte el conector
de línea de señales del DP (17) al conector
(18) de ISC PWB.
16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP
(16) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de
cables 1 del DP (E-1).Instale la cubierta de
cables 2 del DP (E-2).
17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (14) e
instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del
DP (14) usando el tornillo (13) quitado en el
paso 13.
Vaya al paso 23 de la página 10.
15.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP
durch die Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung
(14) des DP.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der
Signalleitung (17) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (18) der ISC-Platine.
16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (16) des DP
durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1)
des DP.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung 2 (E-2) des DP.
17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbringen und die Abdeckung (14) des DPKabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 13
entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 23 auf Seite 10.
15.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP
(16) nel foro presente sul coperchio del connettore cavo DP (14). Collegare il connettore
di linea del segnale DP (17) al connettore
(18) della scheda ISC PWB.
16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP
(16) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del
cavo DP 1 (E-1).Installare il coperchio del
cavo DP 2 (E-2).
17..Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al
coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14),
e quindi installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (14) utilizzando la vite
(13) rimossa nel passo 13.
Procedere al passo 23 a pagina 10.
15.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆连接盖板
(14)的孔。把 DP 信号线的接插件(17)和
ISC 电路板的接插件(18)相连接。
16.将 DP 信号线 (16) 穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1(E-1)
的槽中。安装 DP 电缆盖板 2(E-2)。
17.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板
(14) 上,使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
(13) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。
跳至 P10 的步骤 23。
15.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 DP 케이블
접속커버 (14) 의 구멍으로 통과시킵니다
.DP 신호 신호선 커넥터 (17) 를 ISC PWB 의
커넥터 (18) 에 연결합니다 .
16.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시
그널 라인 케이블 (16) 을 통과시킵니다 . DP
케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 .
17.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 접속커버
(14) 에 부착하고 순서 13 에서 제거한 나사
(13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 부
착합니다 .
P10 의 순서 23 로 진행 .
15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) の穴に DP 信号
線 (16) を通す。
DP 信号線コネクター(17) を
ISC 基板のコネクター(18) に接続する。
16.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線
(16) を通す。DP ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取
り付ける。
17.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ
バー(14) に取り付け、手順 13 で外したビス
(13)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を取
り付ける。
P10 の手順 23 へ進む。
6
A
22
20
35
22
19
21
Connect the DP signal line (DP-772 only)
13.Remove the 4 screws (19).Remove the DP
relay PWB cover (20).
14.Remove the screw (21) and remove the DP
cable connection cover (22).
15.Remove the DP cable connection cap (35)
from the DP cable connection cover (22).
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-772
uniquement)
13.Retirez les 4 vis (19).Retirer le couvercle du
circuit imprimé du relais du DP (20).
14.Déposer la vis (21) et déposer le couvercle
de la connexion du câble du DP (22).
15.Déposer le chapeau de la connexion du
câble du DP (35) du couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP (22).
Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-772
solamente)
13.Quite los 4 tornillos (19).Retire la cubierta de
PWB del relé del DP (20).
14.Quite el tornillo (21) y quite la cubierta de
conexión del cable del DP (22).
15.Quite la tapa de conexión del cable del DP
(35) de la cubierta de conexión del cable del
DP (22).
Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur
DP-772)
13.Entfernen Sie die 4 Schrauben (19).Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DPVerbindungsplatine zum Vorlageneinzug.
14.Die Schraube (21) entfernen und die
Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
abnehmen.
15.Die Kappe (35) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
von der Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP772)
13.Togliere le 4 viti (19).Rimuovere la scheda a
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (20).
14.Rimuovere la vite (21) e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(22).
15.Rimuovere il cappuccio (35) per la connessione del cavo DP dal coperchio di connessione del cavo DP (22).
连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-772)
13.拆除 4 颗螺丝 (19)。取下 DP 中继板的盖板
(20)。
14.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (21),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板
(22)。
15.从 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22) 上拆下 DP 电缆连接
用盖 (35)。
DP 시그널 라인 연결 (DP-772 만)
13.나사 (19) 4 개를 제거합니다 .
DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 제거합니다 .
14.나사 (21) 1 개를 제거한 루 DP 케이블 연결
캡 (22) 을 제거합니다 .
15.DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 에서 DP 케이블
연결 캡 (35) 을 제거합니다 .
DP 信号線の接続
(DP-772 のみ)
13.ビス (19)4 本を外す。DP 中継基板カバー
(20) を取り外す。
14.ビス (21)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ
バー(22) を外す
15.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) から DP ケーブ
ル接続用フタ (35) を取り外す。
7
A
N(M3x8)
22
M
26
30
23
24
25
29
16.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) and the
CIS data line cable (24) through the hole in
DP cable connection cover (22).Connect the
DP signal line connector (25) to the connector (26) of the ISC PWB.
16.Passez le câble de ligne de signal DP (23) et
le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans
le trou du couvercle de connexion du câble
DP (22). Raccordez le connecteur de ligne
de signal DP (25) sur le connecteur (26) de
l'ISC PWB.
Installing the DP relay PWB
17.Connect connector (29) on the DP relay
PWB (M) to connector (30) on the MFP.
Push the lower part of the DP relay PWB
(M) to make sure to connect with connector (29).
Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé relais
du DP
17. Raccorder le connecteur (29) sur la carte de
circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) au connecteur
(30) sur le MFP.
M
18.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with
the two M3 × 8 screws (N) supplied with the
DP-772.
18.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les
deux vis M3 × 8 (N) fournies avec le DP772.
Appuyer sur la partie inférieure de la carte de
circuit imprimé relais du DP (M) pour s'assurer
qu'elle est bien raccordée au connecteur (29).
16.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP
(23) y el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24)
por el orificio de la cubierta de conexión de
cables del DP (22). Conecte el conector de
línea de señales del DP (25) al conector (26)
de ISC PWB.
Instalación del PWB del relé del DP
17.Conecte el conector (29) del PWB del relé
del DP (M) al conector (30) del MFP.
Presione la parte inferior de la PWB del
relé del DP (M) para asegurarse de que se
conecta con el conector (29).
18.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con los dos
tornillos M3 × 8 (N) suministrados con DP772.
16.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP
und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die
Öffnung der Steckerabdeckung (22) des DP.
Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung
(25) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (26) der
ISC-Platine.
Installieren der DP-Verbindungsplatine
17. Den Stecker (29) an der DP-Verbindungsplatine
(M) mit dem Stecker (30) am MFP verbinden
Drücken Sie auf den unteren Teil der DPVerbindungsplatine (M), um sicherzustellen, dass die Verbindung mit dem Stecker
(29) erfolgt.
18.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine
(M). Befestigen Sie es mit den beiden M3 ×
8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang
des DP-772 befinden.
16.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP
(23) e il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) nel
foro presente sul coperchio del connettore
del cavo DP (22). Collegare il connettore di
linea del segnale DP (25) al connettore (26)
della scheda ISC PWB.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP
17. Collegare il connettore (29) sulla scheda a
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) al
connettore (30) sull’MFP.
18.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fissarla con le due viti M3 × 8 (N) fornite con
l'alimentatore DP-772.
16.将 DP 信号线(23)和 CIS 数据线(24)穿过
DP 电缆连接盖板(22)的孔。把 DP 信号线的
接插件(25)和 ISC 电路板的接插件(26)相
连接。
安装 DP 中继板
17.将 DP 中继板(M)上的接插件(29)连接至
MFP 上的接插件(30)。
按压 DP 中继板 (M) 的下部,来确认接插件
(29)已完全连接。
18.固定 DP 中继板(M)。使用 DP-772 附带的 2 颗
M3X8(N) 螺丝来固定。
16.DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터
라인 케이블 (24) 을 DP 케이블 연결 커버
(22) 의 구멍에 통과시킵니다 . DP 시그널 라
인 커넥터 (25) 를 ISC PWB 의 커넥터 (26)
에 연결합니다 .
DP 중계기판의 부착
17.DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (29) 를 MFP 의
커넥터 (30) 에 연결합니다 .
DP 중계 기판 (M) 의 하부를 눌러 코넥터
(29) 를 확실히 연결합니다 .
18.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772
와 함께 공급된 나사 M3×8(N) 2 개를 사용
하여 고정합니다 .
16.DP ケーブル接続カバー(22) の穴に DP 信号
線 (23) と CIS データ線
(24)
を通す。
DP 信号
線コネクター(25) を ISC 基板のコネクター
(26) に接続する。
DP 中継基板の取り付け
17.DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(29) を、MFP
のコネクター(30) に接続する。
DP 中継基板 (M) の下部を押し、コネクター
(29) を確実に接続すること。
18.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。DP-772 に同
梱のビス M3×8(N)2 本で固定する。
8
Spingere la parte inferiore della Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (M) per assicurarsi che venga collegata al connettore (29).
A
E-2
24
E-1
23
31
24
M
22
19.Plug the CIS data line (24) into the connetor
(31) on the DP relay PWB (M).
20.Pass the DP signal line cable (23) along the groove in the DP cable cover 1 (E-1).Pass the CIS
data line cable (24) along the other groove.Install the DP cable cover 2 (E-2).
NOTICE
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (23) and
CIS data line cable (24) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.
19.Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du
CIS (24) dans le connecteur (31) de la carte
de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M).
20.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (23) dans la rainure du couvercle 1 du câble DP (E1).Passez le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) dans l'autre rainure.Installez le couvercle 2 du
câble DP (E-2).
REMARQUE
Pour éviter les problèmes d'image pouvant être causés lorsque le câble de ligne de signal DP
(23) et le câble de ligne de données CIS (24) ont été passé dans une même rainure, assurezvous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure à part comme indiqué sur la figure.
19.Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (24) al conector (31) PWB del relé del DP (M).
20.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP (23) a lo largo de la ranura de la cubierta de cables 1
del DP (E-1).Pase el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la otra ranura.Instale la
cubierta de cables 2 del DP (E-2).
AVISO
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de línea
de señales del DP (23) como el cable de línea de datos de CIS (24) a lo largo de la misma
ranura, asegúrese de pasar cada una de las líneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la
imagen.
19.Die CIS-Datenleitung (24) an den
Stecker(31) auf der DP-Verbindungsplatine
(M) anschließen.
20.Führen Sie die Signalleitung (23) des DP durch die Nut der Steckerabdeckung 1 (E-1) des DP.
Verlegen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die andere Nut.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung 2 (E-2) des DP.
ANMERKUNG
Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden, die entstehen können, wenn die Signalleitung
(23) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (24) durch die gleiche Nut geführt werden, stellen Sie
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut geführt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt.
19.Inserire la linea dati CIS (24) nel connettore(31) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP (M).
20. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) lungo la scanalatura sul coperchio del cavo DP 1 (E1).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) lungo l'altra scanalatura.Installare il coperchio del cavo
DP 2 (E-2).
AVVISO
Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (23) e il
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (24) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far passare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
19.将 CIS 数据线 (24) 连接到 DP 中继电路板
(M) 上的接插件 (31) 上。
20.将 DP 信号线(23)穿过 DP 电缆盖板 1(E-1) 的槽,再把 CIS 数据线(24)穿过别的槽。安装 DP 电缆
盖板 2(E-2)。
注意
如将 DP 信号线(23)和 CIS 数据线(24)穿过同一个槽,可能会出现图像异常,因此必须如图所示
分别穿过左右两侧的槽。
19.DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (31) 에 CIS
데이터 라인 (24) 을 연결합니다 .
20.DP 케이블 커버 1(E-1) 의 홈을 따라 DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 을 통과시킵니다 . 다른 홈을
따라 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 .DP 케이블 커버 2(E-2) 를 설치합니다 .
주의
DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (23) 과 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (24) 을 같은 홈에 통과시키는 경우 화상
문제가 발생할 수 있으므로 그림과 같이 반드시 선을 따로 넣도록 하십시오 .
19.DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(31) に CIS
データ線 (24) を接続する。
20.DP ケーブルカバー1(E-1) の溝に DP 信号線 (23) を通す。別の溝に CIS データ線(24)を通す。DP
ケーブルカバー2(E-2) を取り付ける。
注意
DP 信号線(23)
と CIS データ線(24)を同じ溝に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、
図
の様に左右の溝に別々に入れること。
9
A
A
E
B
22
34
21
B
21.Attach the DP cable cover (E) to the DP
cable connection cover (22) and install the
DP cable connection cover (22) using the
screw (21) removed in step 14.
22.Install the DP relay PWB cover (20) usingthe
four screws(19) removed in step 13.
Fasten the original mat.
23.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (34) upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the
original instruction panel.
24.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.
21.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP (E) sur le
couvercle de la connexion du câble du DP
(22) et installer le couvercle de la connexion
du câble du DP (22) à l'aide de la vis (21)
déposée à l'étape 14.
22.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprimé du
relais du DP (20) à l'aide des quatre vis (19)
retirées à l'étape 13.
Fixer la plaque d’original.
23.Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (34) vers le
haut.
Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche
interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
24.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro.
21. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP (E) a la
cubierta de conexión del cable del DP (22) e
instale la cubierta de conexión del cable del
DP (22) usando el tornillo (21) quitado en el
paso 14.
22.Instale la cubierta de PWB del relé del DP
(20) con los cuatro tornillos (19) que quitó en
el paso 13.
Fije la alfombrilla para originales.
23.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (34) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto.
Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B)
con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones para el original.
24.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.
21.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung (E) an der Abdeckung (22) des DP-Kabelanschlusses anbringen und die Abdeckung (22) des DPKabelanschlusses mittels der in Schritt 14
entfernten Schraube (21) befestigen.
22.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (20) der DPVerbindungsplatine wieder an. Benutzen Sie
die Schraube (19) aus Schritt 13.
21. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP (E) al coper-
Befestigen der Originalmatte.
23.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (34) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen.
Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren
Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
24.Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.
chio di connessione del cavo DP (22), e quindi
installare il coperchio di connessione del cavo
DP (22) utilizzando la vite (21) rimossa nel
passo 14.
22. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti
stampati di comunicazione DP (20) utilizzando
le quattro viti (19) rimosse al punto 13.
Fissaggio del tappetino originale.
23.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (34) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio.
Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale.
24.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.
21.将 DP 电缆盖板 (E) 安装到 DP 电缆连接盖板
(22) 上,使用步骤 14 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
(21) 来安装 DP 电缆连接盖板 (22)。
22.使用在步骤 13 取下的 4 颗螺丝 (19) 来安装
DP 中继板的盖板 (20)。
粘贴原稿垫。
23.将原稿垫(B)放置在稿台玻璃上,并使魔术贴(34)向上。
将原稿垫(B)的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。
24.关闭 DP(A),使原稿垫(B)粘贴到 DP 上。
21.DP 케이블 커버 (E) 를 DP 케이블 연결 커버
(22) 에 부착하고 스텝 14 에서 제거한 나사
(21) 1 개로 DP 케이블 연결 커버 (22) 를 부
착합니다 .
22.13 단계에서 분리한 나사 (19) 4 개를 사용하
여 DP 중계기판 커버 (20) 를 설치합니다 .
원고매트 부착
23.벨크로 (34) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 .
원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 안내판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 .
24.DP(A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP(A) 에 부착합니다 .
21.DP ケーブルカバー(E) を DP ケーブル接続カ
バー(22) に取り付ける。
手順 14 で外したビ
ス (21)1 本で DP ケーブル接続カバー(22)
を取り付ける。
22.手順 13 で外したビス (19)4 本で、DP 中継基
板カバー(20) を取り付ける。
原稿マットの貼り付け
23.マジックテープ (34) を上に向けて、
原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。
原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。
24.DP(A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP(A) に貼り付ける。
10
A
I
H
J(M3x8)
Installing the hinge cover (DP-772 only)
For the DP-770(B), proceed to step 27 on page
12.
25.Install the left hinge cover (H).
26.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
× 8 screw BLACK (J).
Installation des couvercles de charnière
(DP-772 uniquement)
Pour le DP-770(B), passer à l'étape 27 de la
page 12.
25.Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche
(H).
26.Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite
(l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).
Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras
(DP-772 solamente)
Para el DP-770(B), vaya al paso 27 de la página
12.
25.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).
26.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)
usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).
Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung
(nur DP-772)
Beim DP-770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 27 auf
Seite 12 weiter.
25.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbringen.
26.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der
M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Installazione del coperchio cerniera
(solo DP-772)
Per DP-770(B), procedere con il punto 27 a
pagina 12.
25.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).
26.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) utilizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).
安装铰链盖板(仅限 DP-772)
DP-770(B) 跳至 P12 的步骤 27。
25.安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。
26.使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰
链盖板 (I)。
힌지커버 부착(DP-772 만)
DP-770(B) 은 P12 의 순서 27 으로 진행 .
25.좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .
26.나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버
(I) 를 부착합니다 .
ヒンジカバーの取り付け
(DP-772 のみ)
DP-770(B) は、
P12 の手順 27 に進む。
25.左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。
26.ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー
(I) を取り付ける。
11
A
(a)
(b)
K
L
Adhere the label
27.Clean the label on the original table with
alcohol.
28.Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of
which the language corresponding to the
destination of the MFP onto the existing
label on the original table. Figure (a)
29.Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L)
of which the language corresponding to the
destination of the MFP onto the label on the
original table. Figure (b)
Coller l’étiquette relative
27.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trouvant sur le plateau d'original.
28.Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K)
dans la langue correspondant au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a)
29.Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original
en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant
au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du
plateau d'original. Figure (b)
Pegue la etiqueta
27.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta
de originales.
28.Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales.
Figura (a)
29.Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara
del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que
corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la etiqueta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Anbringen des Schildes
27.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit
Alkohol reinigen.
28.Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der
Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des
MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a)
29.Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach
oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (b)
Applicazione dell’etichetta
27.Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano originale.
28.Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzionamento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di
destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esistente sul piano originale. Figura (a)
29.Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente
alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP,
sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)
粘贴标签
27.不需要本步骤。
28.不需要本步骤。
29.不需要本步骤。
라벨 부착
27.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
28.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
29.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
ラベルの貼り付け
27.この作業は不要。
28.この作業は不要。
29.この作業は不要。
12
B
F
DP-772
K*
B
G(M4x14)(8)
C*
K**
J(M3x8)
E-1
E-2
D
M
H
N(M3x8)
L
I
C
A
English
Supplied parts
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Original mat.......................................................... 1
C. Fixing fitting (width: 38.5 mm) ..........2 (DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
C*. Fixing fitting (width: 45 mm)*1 .............................. 1
Français
Pièces fournies
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Plaque d’original .................................................. 1
C. Fixation (largeur: 38,5 mm).................. 2 (DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
C.*Fixation (largeur: 45 mm)*1 ................................... 1
Español
Partes suministradas
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Alfombrilla para originales.................................... 1
C. Herraje de fijación (anchura: 38,5 mm)
.........................................................2 (DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
Deutsch
Enthaltene Teile
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Originalmatte........................................................ 1
C. Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 38,5 mm)
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
D. Angle control fitting............................................... 1
E-1.DP cable cover1 *2 .............................................. 1
E-2.DP cable cover2 *2 .............................................. 1
F. Pin ........................................................................ 1
G. M4 × 14TP screw ................................................. 8
H. Left hinge cover*1 .................................................. 1
I. Right hinge cover*1 ............................................... 1
D. Fixation d’angle .................................................... 1
E-1.Couvercle du câble du DP1 *2 ............................. 1
E-2.Couvercle du câble du DP2 *2 ............................. 1
F. Goupille ................................................................ 1
G. Vis TP M4 × 14..................................................... 8
H. Couvercle de charnière gauche*1 ......................... 1
I. Couvercle de charnière droite*1 ............................ 1
J. Vis M3 × 8 NOIRE*1 .............................................. 1
C*.Herraje de fijación (anchura: 45 mm)*1 ................. 1
D. Herraje de control de ángulo................................ 1
E-1.Cubierta del cable del DP1 *2 .............................. 1
E-2.Cubierta del cable del DP2 *2 .............................. 1
F. Pasador................................................................ 1
G. Tornillo TP M4 × 14 .............................................. 8
H. Cubierta de la bisagra izquierda*1 ........................ 1
I. Cubierta de la bisagra derecha*1 .......................... 1
C*.Befestigungshalterung (Breite: 45 mm)*1.............. 1
D. Winkeleinstellbefestigung..................................... 1
E-1.DP-Kabelabdeckung1 *2 ..................................... 1
E-2.DP-Kabelabdeckung2 *2 ..................................... 1
F. Stift ....................................................................... 1
G. M4 × 14TP Schraube ........................................... 8
H. Linke Scharnierabdeckung*1................................. 1
I. Rechte Scharnierabdeckung*1 .............................. 1
J. M3 × 8 screw BLACK*1 ......................................... 1
K. Label “Operation procedure” ................................1
*: for metric specification
**: for inch specification
L. Caution label “Original face up!”...........................1
M. DP relay PWB*1 .................................................... 1
N. M3 × 8 screw*1 ...................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 only , *2: (E-1) and (E-2) are not used.
K. Étiquette relative à la procédure d’utilisation........ 1
* : pour des spécifications métriques
** : pour des spécifications anglo-saxonnes
L. Étiquette d’avertissement relative à l’orientation
vers le haut de la face de l’original ......................1
M. Carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP*1 .................1
N. Vis M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 uniquement , *2:(E-1) et (E-2) ne sont pas utilisés.
J. Tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO*1 ......................................1
K. Etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” ..................... 1
*: para especificaciones en el sistema métrico
**: para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas
L. Etiqueta de precaución “Original cara arriba” ......1
M. PWB del relé del DP*1...........................................1
N. Tornillo M3 × 8*1 .................................................... 2
*1: DP-772 solamente , *2: (E-1) y (E-2) no se utilizan.
J. M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ*1 ............................. 1
K. Schild “Funktionsanweisung” ..............................1
*: für metrische Angaben
**: für Angaben in Zoll
L. Warnschild “Originalschriftseite nach oben” ........ 1
M. DP-Verbindungsplatine *1 ..................................... 1
N. M3 × 8 Schraube*1 ................................................2
*1: nur DP-772 , *2: (E-1) und ( E-2)werden nicht
benötigt.
C*. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 45 mm)*1 ...... 1
D. Accessorio di regolazione angolare ..................... 1
E-1.Coperchio del cavo DP1 *2 .................................. 1
E-2.Coperchio del cavo DP2 *2 .................................. 1
F. Perno.................................................................... 1
G. Vite M4 × 14TP .................................................... 8
H. Coperchio cerniera sinistra*1 ................................ 1
I. Coperchio cerniera destra*1 .................................. 1
*: per specifiche in unità del sistema metrico
**: per specifiche in pollici
L. Etichetta di avvertimento “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” ... 1
M. Scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP*1 ...1
N. Vite M3 × 8*1 ......................................................... 2
*1: Solo DP-772 , *2:(E-1) e (E-2) non sono utilizzati.
C*.固定工具 ( 宽 45mm) *1 ..................1
D. 角度限制工具 .........................1
E-1.DP 电缆盖板 1*2 ...................... 1
E-2.DP 电缆盖板 2*2 ...................... 1
F. 销 ...................................1
G. M4×14TP 螺丝 .........................8
H. 左部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1
I. 右部铰链盖板 *1 ........................1
J. M3×8 螺丝 BLACK*1 .....................1
M. DP 中继板 *1 ...........................1
N. M3×8 螺丝 *1 ..........................2
*1: 仅限 DP-772
*2: 不使用 (E-1) 和 (E-2)。
(K) 和 (L) 并非附属品。
I. 힌지커버 우 *1 ......................................... 1
J. 나사 M3×8BLACK*1 ................................ 1
M. DP 중계기판 *1 ....................................... 1
N. 나사 M3×8*1 .......................................... 2
1(DP-772)
C*.고정쇠 (45mm 폭 ) *1 ................................1
D. 각도 고정쇠 ........................................... 1
E-1.DP 케이블커버 1*2 ................................. 1
E-2.DP 케이블커버 2*2 ................................. 1
F. 핀 ........................................................ 1
G. 나사 M4×14TP ...................................... 8
H. 힌지커버 좌 *1 ..........................................1
*1: DP-772 만
*2: (E-1) 와 (E-2) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
(K)(L)는 동봉되어 있지 않습니다 .
同梱品
A. DP................................... 1
B. 原稿マット........................... 1
C. 固定金具 (38.5mm 幅 ) ...... 2(DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
C*.固定金具 (45mm 幅 )*1 ...................1
D. 角度規制金具 ........................ 1
E-1.DP ケーブルカバー1*2 ................. 1
E-2.DP ケーブルカバー2*2 ................. 1
F. ピン ................................ 1
G. ビス M4×14TP ........................ 8
H. 左ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1
I. 右ヒンジカバー*1 ......................1
J. ビス M3×8BLACK*1 ......................1
M. DP 中継基板 *1 ........................ 1
N. ビス M3×8*1 .......................... 2
*1:DP-772 のみ
*2:(E-1),(E-2) は使用しない。
(K)(L) は、
同梱されていない。
Italiano
Parti fornite
A. DP ........................................................................ 1
B. Tappetino originale ............................................... 1
C. Accessorio di fissaggio (larghezza: 38,5 mm)
................................................................... 2(DP-770(B))
1 (DP-772)
简体中文
附属品
A. DP................................... 1
B. 原稿垫............................... 1
C. 固定工具 ( 宽 38.5mm) ...... 2(DP-770(B))
1(DP-772)
한국어
동봉품
A. DP........................................................ 1
B. 원고매트................................................ 1
C. 고정쇠 (38.5mm 폭 ) .............. 2(DP-770(B))
日本語
J. Vite M3 × 8 NERA*1 .............................................. 1
K. Etichetta “Procedura di funzionamento” ..............1
13
B
P
O
O. DP cable cover B *3 .................................... 1
P. DP cable cover C *3.................................... 1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
materials from the parts supplied.
*3:(O) and (P) are supplied with the machine.
O. Couvercle du câble du DP B *3 .................. 1
P. Couvercle du câble du DP C *3 .................. 1
*3:(O) et (P) sont fournis avec la machine.
O. Cubierta del cable del DP B
P. Cubierta del cable del DP C
*3
................... 1
.................. 1
*3
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
*3:(O) y (P) se proporcionan con la máquina.
O. DP-Kabelabdeckung B *3 ........................... 1
P. DP-Kabelabdeckung C *3 ........................... 1
*3:(O) und (P) werden mit dem Gerät ausgeliefert.
O. Coperchio del cavo DP B *3 ....................... 1
P. Coperchio del cavo DP B *3 ....................... 1
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder
und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di
protezione dalle parti fornite.
*3:(O) e (P) sono forniti con la macchina.
O. DP 电缆盖板 B
P. DP 电缆盖板 C
*3
*3
...................... 1
...................... 1
如果附属品上带有固定胶带,缓冲材料时务必揭
下。
*3:(O),(P) 是机器的附属品。
O. DP 케이블커버 B *3 .............................. 1
P. DP 케이블커버 C *3 .............................. 1
동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
*3: (O),(P) 는 본체와 함께 제공됩니다 .
O. DP ケーブルカバーB *3 ................. 1
P. DP ケーブルカバーC *3 ................. 1
*3:(O),(P) は機械本体に同梱。
14
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
は必ず取り外すこと。
G(M4x14)
C
G(M4x14)
C
2
2
1
1
NOTICE
The illustrations of the DP in the Installation
Guide are for DP-772.
Procedure
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-770(B))
1.Align projections (1) of each fixing fitting (C)
with holes (2) on the MFP and insert the fixing fittings (C) into the MFP.
2.Secure each fixing fitting (C) with two M4 x
14TP screws (G).
REMARQUE
Les schémas du DP dans le Guide d''installation
concernent le DP-772.
Procédure
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-770(B))
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de chacune des
pièces de fixation (C) avec les trous (2) sur
le MFP et insérer ces pièces (C) dans le
MFP.
2.Fixer chacune des pièces de fixation (C)
avec deux vis M4 x 14TP (G).
AVISO
Las ilustraciones del DP en la Guía de instalación corresponden al DP-772.
Procedimiento
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-770(B))
1.Alinee las salientes (1) de cada herraje de
fijación (C) con los orificios (2) del MFP e
inserte los herrajes de fijación (C) en el MFP.
2.Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación
(C) con dos tornillos M4 x 14TP (G).
ANMERKUNG
Die Abbildungen des DP in der
Installationsanleitung gelten für Modell DP-772.
Vorgehensweise
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
AVVISO
Le illustrazioni del DP nella Guida
all’installazione sono per il modello DP-772.
Procedura
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP770(B))
1.Die Zapfen (1) jeder Befestigungshalterung
(C) mit den Öffnungen (2) am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen (C) in
den MFP einsetzen.
2.Jede Befestigungshalterung (C) mit zwei M4
x 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP770(B))
1.Allineare le sporgenze (1) di ogni accessorio
di fissaggio (C) con i fori (2) sull’MFP, ed
inserire gli accessori di fissaggio (C)
nell’MFP.
2.Bloccare ogni accessorio di fissaggio (C)
con le due viti M4 x 14TP (G).
注意
安装手册中关于 DP 的图示以 DP-772 为例。
安装步骤
安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关,并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
安装固定工具。(DP-770(B))
1.将各固定工具(C)上的突出部分(1)与 MFP
上的孔(2)对齐,然后将固定工具(C)插入
MFP 中。
2.用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)固定各固定工具
(C)。
주의
설치순서에 기재되어 있는 DP 일러스트는 DP772 입니다 .
설치순서
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
고정쇠의 부착(DP-770(B))
1.고정쇠 (C) 의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 의 구멍 (2)
을 맞추고 MFP 에 고정쇠 (C) 를 꽂습니다 .
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 2 개의 고정쇠
(C) 를 고정합니다 .
注意
設置手順書に記載している DP のイラストは、
DP-772 です。
取付手順
必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
固定金具の取り付け(DP-770(B))
1.固定金具 (C) の突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2) を
合わせ、MFP に固定金具 (C) を差し込む。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で 2 つの固定金具
(C) を固定する。
15
B
G(M4x14)
C*
G(M4x14)
B
G(M4x14)
F
C
G(M4x14)
C (C*)
A
2
C
4
2
1
1
A
C (C*)
3
5
Attach the fixing fitting (DP-772)
1.Align the projections (1) on the right fixing fitting (C) and on the wider left fixing fitting (C*)
with the respective holes (2) in the MFP and
then insert the fixing fittings into the MFP.
2.Secure each of the fixing fittings (C) (C*)
with 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Install the DP
3.Align hinge hole (3) of DP (A) with pin (4) of
fixing fitting (C), place DP (A) on the MFP.
4.Slide the DP (A) toward the front side and
engage hinges into hooks (5) on fixing fittings (C).
5.Install DP (A) onto the MFP securely with pin
(F) and two M4 × 14TP screws (G).
Mettre en place la fixation (DP-772)
1.Aligner les saillies (1) de la fixation droite (C)
et de la fixation gauche plus large (C*) avec
les trous correspondants (2) du MFP et
insérer les fixations dans le MFP.
2.Fixer chaque des fixations (C) (C*) avec 2
vis TP M4 × 14 (G).
Installer le DP
3.Aligner le trou de la charnière (3) du DP (A)
sur la goupille (4) de la fixation (C) et placer
le DP (A) sur le MFP.
4.Faire glisser le DP (A) vers l'avant et
engager les charnières dans les crochets (5)
sur les pièces de fixation (C).
5.Installer le DP (A) sur le MFP en le fixant à
l’aide de la goupille (F) et des deux vis TP
M4 × 14 (G).
Monte el herraje de fijación (DP-772)
1. Alinee los salientes (1) del herraje de fijación derecho (C) y del herraje de fijación izquierdo más
ancho (C*) con los orificios correspondientes (2)
del MFP y, después, inserte los herrajes de fijación
en el MFP.
2. Asegure cada uno de los herrajes de fijación (C)
(C*) con 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G).
Instale el DP
3.Alinee el orificio de bisagra (3) del DP (A)
con el pasador (4) del herraje de fijación (C)
y coloque el DP (A) en el MFP.
4.Deslice el DP (A) hacia el frente y enganche
las bisagras en los ganchos (5) de los herrajes de fijación (C).
5.Instale el DP (A) firmemente en el MFP con
el pasador (F) y dos tornillos TP M4 × 14
(G).
Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung (DP-772)
1. Die Zapfen (1) an der rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) und an der breiteren Befestigungshalterung (C*) mit den entsprechenden Öffnungen (2)
am MFP ausrichten und die Befestigungshalterungen in den MFP einsetzen.
2. Die Befestigungshalterungen (C) (C*) mit den 2 M4
× 14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Installieren des DP
3.Scharnierloch (3) des DP (A) mit Stift (4) der
Befestigungshalterung (C) ausrichten, und
DP (A) auf den MFP stellen.
4.Den DP (A) nach vorne hin verschieben und
die Scharniere in die Haken (5) an den Befestigungshalterungen (C) einsetzen.
5.DP (A) sicher mit einem Stift (F) und zwei M4
× 14TP Schrauben (G) am MFP befestigen.
Applicazione dell’accessorio di fissaggio (DP-772)
1. Allineare le sporgenze (1) sull'accessorio di fissag-
Montaggio del DP
3.Allineare il foro della cerniera (3) del DP (A)
con il perno (4) dell’accessorio di fissaggio
(C), quindi posizionare il DP (A) sull’MFP.
4.Far scorrere il DP (A) verso il lato anteriore
ed inserire le cerniere nei ganci (5) sugli
accessori di fissaggio (C).
5.Montare il DP (A) sull’MFP assicurandolo
con il perno (F) e due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
安装 DP
3.将 DP(A)的铰链孔(3)对准固定工具(C)的
销(4),并将 DP(A)放在 MFP 上。
4.朝前侧滑动 DP(A),然后将铰链与固定工具
(C)上的卡扣(5)相啮合。
5.用销(F)和两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)将 DP
(A)安装到 MFP 上。
고정쇠의 부착(DP-772)
1.우측에 고정쇠 (C), 좌측에 광폭 고정쇠 (C*)
각각의 돌기 (1) 와 MFP 구멍 (2) 을 맞추고
MFP 에 꽂습니다 .
2.나사 M4×14TP(G) 각 2 개로 고정쇠 (C) 와
고정쇠 (C*) 를 고정합니다 .
DP 부착
3.DP(A) 의 힌지부 구멍 (3) 과 고정쇠 (C) 핀
(4) 을 맞추고 MFP 에 DP(A) 를 올립니다 .
4.DP(A) 를 밀어 힌지부를 고정쇠 (C) 의 걸쇠
(5) 에 끼웁니다 .
5.핀 (F) 1 개와 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로
DP(A) 를 MFP 에 고정합니다 .
固定金具の取り付け(DP-772)
1.右側に固定金具 (C)、
左側に幅広の固定金具
(C*) のそれぞれの突起 (1) と MFP の穴 (2)
を合わせ、MFP に差し込む。
2.ビス M4×14TP(G) 各 2 本で固定金具 (C) と
固定金具 (C*) を固定する。
DP の取り付け
3.DP(A) のヒンジ部の穴 (3) と固定金具 (C)
のピン (4) を合わせ、MFP に DP(A) を乗せ
る。
4.DP(A) を手前にスライドさせ、ヒンジ部を固
定金具 (C) の引っ掛け部 (5) にはめ込む。
5.ピン (F)1 本とビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で
DP(A) を MFP に固定する。
gio destro (C) e sull'accessorio di fissaggio sinistro
più largo (C*) con i rispettivi fori (2) nell'MFP, e
quindi inserire gli accessori di fissaggio nell'MFP.
2. Fissare ciascuno degli accessori di fissaggio (C)
(C*) con 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G).
安装固定工具 (DP-772)
1.将固定工具 (C) 从右侧、宽幅固定夹具 (C*)
从左侧将各自的突出部分 (1) 与 MFP 的孔
(2) 对齐并插入到 MFP 中。
2.使用各 2 颗 M4×14 螺丝 TP(G) 来固定固定工
具 (C) 与固定工具 (C*)
16
A
6
8
B
12
9
11
G(M4x14)
D
D
10
7
Install the angle control fitting
To adjust DP open-close angle 60 degrees
6.Install angle control fitting (D) at the rear side
of the right hinge with two M4 × 14TP screws
(G).
To adjust DP open-close angle 30 degrees
7.Open the upper cover (6) of the DP (A).
8.Remove the four screws (7) and (8).
Remove the strap (9) from the rear cover
(10). Remove the rear cover (10) of the DP
(A).
9.Remove stop ring (11) of angle control fitting
(D) that has been installed in step 6 to
remove shaft (12).
Installer la fixation d’angle
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture
du DP de 60 degrés
6.Placer la fixation d’angle (D) à l’arrière de la
charnière droite à l’aide des deux vis TP M4
× 14 (G).
Pour régler l’angle d’ouverture/de fermeture
du DP de 30 degrés
7.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A).
8.Retirer les quatre vis (7) et (8).Retirer la
courroie (9) du couvercle arrière (10).Retirer
la couvercle arrière (10) du DP (A).
9.Retirer l’anneau de butée (11) de la fixation
d’angle (D) installée à l’étape 6 pour enlever
la tige (12).
Instale el herraje de control de ángulo
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 60
grados
6.Instale el herraje de control de ángulo (D) en
el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con
dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G).
Para ajustar el DP, abra o cierre el ángulo 30
grados
7.Abra la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
8.Quite los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8).Retire la
correa (9) de la cubierta posterior (10).Quite
la cubierta posterior (10) del DP (A).
9.Retire el anillo de retención (11) del herraje
de control de ángulo (D) que se instaló en el
paso 6 para retirar el eje (12).
Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefestigung
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 60 Grad
6.Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 ×
14TP Schrauben (G) befestigen.
Einstellen des Öffnungs-/Schließungswinkels des DP um 30 Grad
7. Die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A) öffnen.
8.Entfernen Sie die vier Schrauben (7) und
(8).Entfernen Sie den Riemen (9) der hinteren Abdeckung (10).Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) des DP (A).
9.Anschlagring (11) von der Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) abnehmen, die in Schritt 6 montiert wurde, um die Welle (12) zu entfernen.
Montaggio dell’accessorio di regolazione
angolare
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura
del DP a 60 gradi
6.Montare l’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D) sul lato posteriore della cerniera
destra con due viti M4 × 14TP (G).
Per regolare l’angolo di chiusura / apertura
del DP a 30 gradi
7.Aprire il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A).
8.Togliere le quattro viti (7) e (8).Rimuovere la
cinghietta (9) dal coperchio posteriore
(10).Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (10)
del DP (A).
9.Rimuovere l’anello di bloccaggio (11)
dell’accessorio di regolazione angolare (D)
che era stato installato al Punto 6 per
rimuovere l’albero (12).
安装角度限制工具
若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 60 度
6.在右部铰链的后部使用两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝
(G)安装角度限制工具(D)。
若要将 DP 的开关角度调整为 30 度
7.打开 DP(A)的上盖板(6)。
8.取下 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8)。从后盖板 (10) 上取
下塑料片 (9)。取下 DP(A) 的后盖板 (10)。
9.拆下在第 6 步中安装的角度控制配件(D)的
止动环(11),以将轴(12)拆下。
각도 고정쇠의 부착
DP 개폐각도를 60 도로 설정하는 경우
6.우 힌지 뒷측에 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개로
각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 부착합니다 .
DP 개폐 각도를 30 도로 설정하는 경우
7.DP(A) 의 DP 윗커버 (6) 를 엽니다 .
8.나사 (7), (8) 4 개를 제거합니다 . 스트랩 (9)
를 후면 커버 (10) 에서 제거합니다 .DP(A)
의 후면 커버 (10) 를 제거합니다 .
9.순서 6 에서 부착한 각도 고정쇠 (D) 의 스톱
링 (11) 1 개를 제거하고 샤프트 (12) 를 제거
합니다 .
角度規制金具の取り付け
DP 開閉角度を 60 度に設定する場合
6.右ヒンジ後側にビス M4×14TP(G)2 本で角度
規制金具 (D) を取り付ける。
DP 開閉角度を 30 度に設定する場合
7.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(6) を開く。
8.ビス (7)、(8) 4 本を外す。
ストラップ (9) を
後カバー(10) から外す。
DP(A) の後カバー
(10) を取り外す。
9.手順 6 で取り付けた角度規制金具 (D) のス
トップリング (11)1 個を外し、シャフト
(12) を取り外す。
17
B
14
14
11
12
12
13
10. Insert shaft (12) into the rear side of the right hinge.
11. Attach stop ring (11) to the notch of shaft (12) and secure shaft (12).
12. Reinstall the rear cover (10) using the four screws (7) and (8) removed in step
8.Attach the strap (9) in the rear cover (10).Close the upper cover (6) of the
DP (A).
10. Insérer la tige (12) à l’arrière de la charnière droite.
11. Fixer l’anneau de butée (11) sur l’encoche de la tige (12) et mettre en place
la tige (12).
12. Remonter la couvercle arrière (10) à l'aide des quatre vis (7) et (8) retirées à
l'étape 8.Fixer la courroie (9) dans le couvercle arrière (10).Refermer le
couvercle supérieur (6) du DP (A).
10. Inserte el eje (12) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha.
11. Fije el anillo de retención (11) a la muesca del eje (12) y asegure el eje (12).
12. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta posterior (10) con los cuatro tornillos (7) y (8)
que quitó en el paso 8.Coloque la correa (9) de la cubierta posterior
(10).Cierre la cubierta superior (6) del DP (A).
10. Welle (12) in die Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einsetzen.
11. Anschlagring (11) an der Wellenkerbe (12) anbringen und Welle befestigen (12).
12. Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (10) wieder an. Benutzen Sie die vier
Schrauben (7) und (8) aus Schritt 8.Befestigen Sie den Riemen (9) der hinteren
Abdeckung (10).Schließen Sie die obere Abdeckung (6) des DP (A).
10. Inserire l’albero (12) nella parte posteriore della cerniera destra.
11. Applicare l’anello di bloccaggio (11) nell’incavo dell’albero (12) e assicurare
l’albero (12).
12. Rimontare il coperchio posteriore (10) utilizzando le quattro viti (7) e (8)
rimosse al punto 8.Rimontare la cinghietta (9) sul coperchio posteriore
(10).Chiudere il pannello superiore (6) del DP (A).
13
Connect the DP signal line (DP-770(B) only)
For the DP-772, proceed to step 13 on page 20.
13.Remove the screw (13) and remove the DP cable connection cover
(14).
*(14) is not used.
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-770(B) uniquement)
Pour le DP-772, passer à l'étape 13 en page 20.
13.Déposer la vis (13) et déposer le couvercle de la connexion du câble
du DP (14).
*(14) n'est pas utilisé.
Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-770(B) solamente)
Para el DP-772, vaya al paso 13 de la página 20.
13.Quite el tornillo (13) y quite la cubierta de conexión del cable del DP
(14).
*(14) no se utiliza.
Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur DP-770(B))
Beim DP-772 weitergehen zu Schritt 13 auf Seite 20.
13.Die Schraube (13) entfernen und die Abdeckung (14) des DP-Kabelanschlusses abnehmen.
*(14) wird nicht benötigt.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP-770(B))
Per il DP-772, procedere al passo 13 a pagina 20.
13.Rimuovere la vite (13) e quindi rimuovere il coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP (14).
*(14) non è utilizzato.
10.将轴(12)插入到右部铰链的后部。
11.将止动环(11)安装到轴(12)的切口并将轴(12)固定。
12.使用步骤 8 中取下的 4 颗螺丝 (7),(8) 来按原样安装后盖板 (10)。把塑
料片 (9) 安装到后盖板 (10)。关闭 DP(A) 的 DP 上盖板 (6)。
连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-770(B))
DP-772 跳至 P20 的步骤 13。
13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (13),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板 (14)。
※ 不使用 (14)。
10. 우 힌지 뒷측에 샤프트 (12) 를 삽입합니다 .
11. 스톱링 (11) 을 샤프트 (12) 의 구에 부착하고 샤프트 (12) 를 고정합니다 .
12. 순서 8 에서 제거한 나사 (7),(8) 4 개를 사용하여 후면 커버 (10) 를 원래대
DP 신호선의 접속(DP-770(B) 만)
DP-772 은 P20 의 순서 13 으로 진행 .
13.나사 (13) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 접속커버 (14) 를 제거합니다 .
※(14) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
로 부착합니다 . 스트랩 (9) 을 후면 커버 (10) 에 부착합니다 .DP(A) 의 DP
윗 커버 (6) 를 닫습니다 .
10.右ヒンジ後側にシャフト (12) を挿入する。
11.ストップリング (11) をシャフト (12) の溝に取り付け、シャフト (12)
を固定する。
12.手順 8 で外したビス (7)、(8) 4 本で後カバー(10) を元通り取り付け
る。ストラップ (9) を後カバー(10) に取り付ける。DP(A) の DP 上カ
バー(6) を閉じる。
18
DP 信号線の接続(DP-770(B) のみ)
DP-772 は P20 の手順 13 へ進む。
13.ビス (13)1 本を外して、
DP ケーブル接続カバー(14) を外す。
※(14) は使用しない。
15
15
B
O
17
O
16
14.Pass the DP signal line cable (15) along the
large groove in the DP cable cover B (O).
15.Connect the DP signal line connector (16) to
the connector (17) of the ISC PWB.
16.Install the DP cable cover B (O).
14.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (15)
dans la grande rainure du couvercle B du
câble DP (O).
15.Raccordez le connecteur de ligne de signal
DP (16) sur le connecteur (17) de l'ISC
PWB.
16.Installez le couvercle B du câble DP (O).
14.Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP
(15) a lo largo de la ranura grande de la
cubierta de cables B del DP (O).
15.Conecte el conector de línea de señales del
DP (16) al conector (17) de ISC PWB.
16.Instale la cubierta de cables B del DP (O).
14.Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung (15) durch
die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B
(O).
15.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung
(16) des DP mit dem Steckverbinder (17) der
ISC-Platine.
16.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung B (O)
des DP.
14.Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP
(15) lungo la scanalatura grande sul coperchio B del cavo DP (O).
15.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale
DP (16) al connettore (17) della scheda ISC
PWB.
16.Installare il coperchio del cavo DP B (O).
14.将 DP 信号线(15)穿过 DP 电缆盖板 B(O)的
大沟槽。
15.把 DP 信号线的接插件(16)和 ISC 电路板的
接插件(17)相连接。
16.安装 DP 电缆盖板 B(O)。
14.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 의 큰 홈을 따라 DP 시
그널 라인 케이블 (15) 을 통과시킵니다 .
15.DP 시그널 라인 커넥터 (16) 를 ISC PWB 의
커넥터 (17) 에 연결합니다 .
16.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 를 설치합니다 .
14.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) の大きい溝に DP 信
号線 (15) を通す。
15.DP 信号線コネクター(16) を ISC 基板のコネ
クター(17) に接続する。
16.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) を取り付ける。
19
B
P
19
20
O
18
20
13
21
17.Attach the DP cable cover C (P) to the DP
cable cover B (O) and install the DP cable
cover C (P) using the screw (13) removed in
step 13.
Proceed to step 25 on page 25.
Connect the DP signal line (DP-772 only)
13.Remove the screw (18).Remove the DP
relay PWB cover (19).
14.Remove the two screws (20). Remove the
cover (21) from the machine.
17.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) sur
le couvercle du câble du DP B (O) et
installer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) à
l'aide de la vis (13) déposée à l'étape 13.
Passer à l'étape 25 de la page 25.
Raccorder le circuit de transmission (DP-772
uniquement)
13.Retirez la vis (18).Retirer le couvercle du circuit imprimé du relais du DP (19).
14.Retirez les deux vis (20).Retirer le couvercle
(21) de la machine.
17. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) a la
cubierta del cable del DP B (O) e instale la
cubierta del cable del DP C (P) usando el
tornillo (13) quitado en el paso 13.
Vaya al paso 25 de la página 25.
Conecte la línea de señales del DP (DP-772
solamente)
13.Quite el tornillo (18).Retire la cubierta de
PWB del relé del DP (19).
14.Quite los dos tornillos (20).Retire la cubierta
(21) de la máquina.
17.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) an der DPKabelabdeckung B (O) anbringen und die
DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) mittels der in
Schritt 13 entfernten Schraube (13) befestigen.
Weitergehen zu Schritt 25 auf Seite 25.
Anschließen der DP-Signalleitungen (nur
DP-772)
13.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (18).Entfernen
Sie die Abdeckung (19) der DP-Verbindungsplatine zum Vorlageneinzug.
14.Entfernen Sie die beiden Schrauben
(20).Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung (21) vom
Gerät.
17.Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) al
coperchio del cavo DP B (O), e quindi installare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) utilizzando la vite (13) rimossa nel passo 13.
Procedere al passo 25 a pagina 25.
Collegare la linea del segnale DP (solo DP772)
13.Togliere la vite (18).Rimuovere la scheda a
circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP (19).
14.Togliere le due viti (20).Rimuovere il coperchio (21) dalla macchina.
17.将 DP 电缆盖板 C(P) 安装到 DP 电缆盖板
B(O) 上,使用步骤 13 中拆下的 1 颗螺丝
(13) 来安装 DP 电缆盖板 C(P)。
跳至 P25 的步骤 25。
连接 DP 信号线(仅限 DP-772)
13.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (18)。取下 DP 中继板的盖板
(19)。
14.取下 2 颗螺丝(20)。从机器上拆下盖板
(21)。
17.DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 DP 케이블 커버
B(O) 에 부착하고 스텝 13 에서 제거한 나사
(13) 1 개로 DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 부착합
니다 .
P25 의 스텝 25 로 진행 .
DP 시그널 라인 연결(DP-772 만)
13.나사 (18) 1 개를 제거합니다 .
DP 중계기판 커버 (19) 를 제거합니다 .
14.나사 (20) 두 개를 제거합니다 . 본체에서 커
버 (21) 를 분리합니다 .
17.DP ケーブルカバーC(P) を DP ケーブルカ
バーB(O) に取り付け、手順 13 で外したビス
(13)1 本で固定する。
P25 の手順 25 へ進む。
DP 信号線の接続(DP-772 のみ)
13.ビス (18)1 本を外す。DP 中継基板カバー
(19) を取り外す。
14.ビス (20)2 本を外す。機械本体からフタ
(21) を取り外す。
20
24
23
24
B
25
22
25
O
15.Remove the screw (22) and remove the DP
cable connection cover (23).
*(23) is not used.
16.Pass the DP signal line cable (24) along the large groove in the DP cable cover B (O).Pass the
CIS data line cable (25) along the other small groove.
NOTICE
To avoid image problems that may be caused when the both of the DP signal line cable (24) and
CIS data line cable (25) were passed through in a same groove, be sure to slip the individual line
in a separate groove as shown in the figure.
15.Déposer la vis (22) et déposer le couvercle
de la connexion du câble du DP (23).
*(23) n'est pas utilisé.
16.Passez le câble de la ligne du signal DP (24) dans la grande rainure du couvercle B du câble DP
(O).Passez le câble de ligne de données CIS (25) dans l'autre petite rainure.
REMARQUE
Pour éviter les problèmes d'image pouvant être causés lorsque le câble de ligne de signal DP
(24) et le câble de ligne de données CIS (25) ont été passé dans une même rainure, assurezvous de glisser chaque ligne dans une rainure à part comme indiqué sur la figure.
15.Quite el tornillo (22) y quite la cubierta de
conexión del cable del DP (23).
*(23) no se utiliza.
16. Pase el cable de línea de señales del DP (24) a lo largo de la ranura grande de la cubierta de
cables B del DP (O).Pase el cable de línea de datos de CIS (25) a lo largo de la otra ranura
pequeña.
AVISO
Para evitar posibles problemas de imagen como consecuencia de pasar tanto el cable de línea de
señales del DP (24) como el cable de línea de datos de CIS (25) a lo largo de la misma ranura,
asegúrese de pasar cada una de las líneas por una ranura distinta como se muestra en la imagen.
15.Die Schraube (22) entfernen und die
Abdeckung (23) des DP-Kabelanschlusses
abnehmen.
*(23) wird nicht benötigt.
16.Führen Sie die DP Signalleitung (24) durch die große Nut der DP Steckerabdeckung B (O).Verlegen Sie die Datenleitung der CIS (25) durch die andere Nut.
ANMERKUNG
Um Probleme mit der Bildqualität zu vermeiden, die entstehen können, wenn die Signalleitung
(24) des DP und die Datenleitung der CIS (25) durch die gleiche Nut geführt werden, stellen Sie
sicher, dass jede Leitung in einer getrennten Nut geführt wird, wie in dem Bild gezeigt.
15.Rimuovere la vite (22) e quindi rimuovere il
coperchio di la connessione del cavo DP
(23).
*(23) non è utilizzato.
16. Far passare il cavo di linea del segnale DP (24) lungo la scanalatura grande sul coperchio B del cavo
DP (O).Far passare il cavo di linea dei dati CIS (25) lungo l'altra scanalatura piccola.
AVVISO
Per evitare i problemi di immagine che si verificano quando il cavo di linea del segnale DP (24) e il
cavo di linea dei dati CIS (25) vengono fatti passare nella stessa scanalatura, ricordarsi di far passare questi due cavi in scanalature separate come indicato in figura.
15.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (22),拆下 DP 电缆连接盖板
(23)。
※ 不使用 (23)。
16.将 DP 信号线(24)穿过 DP 电缆盖板 B(O)的大沟槽。把 CIS 数据线(25)穿过别的小沟槽。
15.나사 (22) 1 개를 빼고 DP 케이블 접속커버
(23) 를 제거합니다 .
※(23) 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
16.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 의 큰 홈을 따라 DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (24) 을 통과시킵니다 . 다른 작은
홈을 따라 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (25) 을 통과시킵니다 .
注意
如将 DP 信号线(24)和 CIS 数据线(25)穿过同一个槽,可能会出现图像异常,因此必须如图所示
分别穿过左右两侧的槽。
주의
DP 시그널 라인 케이블 (24) 과 CIS 데이터 라인 케이블 (25) 을 같은 홈에 통과시키는 경우 화상
문제가 발생할 수 있으므로 그림과 같이 반드시 선을 따로 넣도록 하십시오 .
15.ビス (22)1 本を外して、DP ケーブル接続カ
バー(23) を外す。
※(23) は使用しない。
16.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) の大きい溝に DP 信号線 (24) を通す。別の小さい溝に CIS データ線
(25)
を通す。
注意
DP 信号線(24)
と CIS データ線(25)を同じ溝に通すと異常画像が発生する可能性があるため、
図
の様に左右の溝に別々に入れること。
21
B
27
29
26
28
M
17.Connect the DP signal line connector (26) to the connector (27) of the
ISC PWB.
Installing the DP relay PWB
18.Connect connector (28) on the DP relay PWB (M) to connector (29) on
the MFP.
Push the lower part of the DP relay PWB (M) to make sure to connect with connector (28).
17.Raccordez le connecteur de ligne de signal DP (26) sur le connecteur
(27) de l'ISC PWB.
Installation de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP
18.Raccorder le connecteur (28) sur la carte de circuit imprimé relais du
DP (M) au connecteur (29) sur le MFP.
Appuyer sur la partie inférieure de la carte de circuit imprimé
relais du DP (M) pour s'assurer qu'elle est bien raccordée au connecteur (28).
17.Conecte el conector de línea de señales del DP (26) al conector (27)
de ISC PWB.
Instalación del PWB del relé del DP
18.Conecte el conector (28) del PWB del relé del DP (M) al conector (29)
del MFP.
Presione la parte inferior de la PWB del relé del DP (M) para asegurarse de que se conecta con el conector (28).
17.Verbinden Sie den Stecker der Signalleitung (26) des DP mit dem
Steckverbinder (27) der ISC-Platine.
Installieren der DP-Verbindungsplatine
18.Den Stecker (28) an der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M) mit dem Stecker
(29) am MFP verbinden.
Drücken Sie auf den unteren Teil der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M),
um sicherzustellen, dass die Verbindung mit dem Stecker (28)
erfolgt.
17.Collegare il connettore di linea del segnale DP (26) al connettore (27)
della scheda ISC PWB.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP
18.Collegare il connettore (28) sulla scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP (M) al connettore (29) sull’MFP.
Spingere la parte inferiore della Scheda a circuiti stampati di
comunicazione DP (M) per assicurarsi che venga collegata al connettore (28).
17.把 DP 信号线的接插件(26)和 ISC 电路板的接插件(27)相连接。
安装 DP 中继板
18.将 DP 中继板(M)上的接插件(28)连接至 MFP 上的接插件(29)。
按压 DP 中继板 (M) 的下部,来确认接插件(28)已完全连接。
17.DP 시그널 라인 커넥터 (26) 를 ISC PWB 의 커넥터 (27) 에 연결합니
다.
DP 중계기판의 부착
18.DP 중계기판 (M) 의 커넥터 (28) 를 MFP 의 커넥터 (29) 에 연결합니
다.
DP 중계 기판 (M) 의 하부를 눌러 코넥터 (28) 를 확실히 연결합니다 .
17.DP 信号線コネクター(26) を ISC 基板のコネクター(27) に接続する。
DP 中継基板の取り付け
18.DP 中継基板 (M) のコネクター(28) を、MFP のコネクター(29) に接続す
る。
DP 中継基板 (M) の下部を押し、コネクター(28) を確実に接続するこ
と。
22
B
N(M3x8)
25
M
N
30
M
19.Secure the DP relay PWB (M). Secure it with the two M3 × 8 screws
(N) supplied with the DP-772.
20.Plug the CIS data line (25) into the connetor (30) on the DP relay PWB
(M).
19.Fixez la DP relay PWB (M). Fixez-la avec les deux vis M3 × 8 (N)
fournies avec le DP-772.
20.Enficher le câble de la ligne des données du CIS (25) dans le connecteur (30) de la carte de circuit imprimé relais du DP (M).
19.Fije el DP relay PWB (M). Fíjelo con los dos tornillos M3 × 8 (N) suministrados con DP-772.
20.Enchufe la línea de datos CIS (25) al conector (30) PWB del relé del
DP (M).
19.Befestigen Sie die DP Verbindungsplatine (M). Befestigen Sie es mit
den beiden M3 × 8 Schrauben (N), die sich im Lieferumfang des DP772 befinden.
20.Die CIS-Datenleitung (25) an den Stecker(30) auf der DP-Verbindungsplatine (M) anschließen.
19.Fissare la scheda DP Relay PWB (M). Fissarla con le due viti M3 × 8
(N) fornite con l'alimentatore DP-772.
20.Inserire la linea dati CIS (25) nel connettore(30) sulla scheda a circuiti
stampati di comunicazione DP (M).
19.固定 DP 中继板(M)。使用 DP-772 附带的 2 颗 M3X8(N) 螺丝来固定。
20.将 CIS 数据线 (25) 连接到 DP 中继电路板 (M) 上的接插件 (30) 上。
19.DP 중계 PWB (M) 를 고정합니다 . DP-772 에 같이 곤포의 나사
M3×8(N) 2 개로 고정합니다 .
20.DP 중계기판 (M) 상의 커넥터 (30) 에 CIS 데이터선 (25) 을 접속합니
다.
19.DP 中継基板 (M) を固定する。DP-772 に同梱のビス M3×8(N)2 本で固
定する。
20.DP 中継基板 (M) 上のコネクター(30) に CIS データ線 (25) を接続す
る。
23
B
O
P
O
22
21.Install the DP cable cover B (O).
22.Attach the DP cable cover C (P) to the DP cable cover B (O) and install
the DP cable cover C (P) using the screw (22) removed in step 15.
23.Install the cover (21) using the 2 screws (20) removed in step 14.
24.Install the DP relay PWB cover (19) using the screw (18) removed in
step 13.
21.Installez le couvercle B du câble DP (O).
22.Fixer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) sur le couvercle du câble du
DP B (O) et installer le couvercle du câble du DP C (P) à l'aide de la vis
(22) déposée à l'étape 15.
23.Installez le couvercle (21) à l'aide des 2 vis (20) retirées à l'étape 14.
24.Installez le couvercle du circuit imprimé du relais du DP (19) à l'aide de
la vis (18) retirées à l'étape 13.
21.Instale la cubierta de cables B del DP (O).
22. Fije la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) a la cubierta del cable del DP B
(O) e instale la cubierta del cable del DP C (P) usando el tornillo (22)
quitado en el paso 15.
23.Instale la cubierta (21) con los 2 tornillos (20) que quitó en el paso 14.
24.Instale la cubierta de PWB del relé del DP (19) con los el tornillos (18)
que quitó en el paso 13.
21.Befestigen Sie die Steckerabdeckung B (O) des DP.
22.Die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) an der DP-Kabelabdeckung B (O)
anbringen und die DP-Kabelabdeckung C (P) mittels der in Schritt 15
entfernten Schraube (22) befestigen.
23.Bringen Sie Abdeckung (21) wieder an. Benutzen Sie die 2 Schrauben
(20) aus Schritt 14.
24.Bringen Sie die Abdeckung (19) der DP-Verbindungsplatine wieder an.
Benutzen Sie die Schraube (18) aus Schritt 13.
21. Installare il coperchio del cavo DP B (O).
22. .Fissare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) al coperchio del cavo DP B (O), e
quindi installare il coperchio del cavo DP C (P) utilizzando la vite (22)
rimossa nel passo 15.
23. Installare il coperchio (21) utilizzando le 2 viti (20) rimosse al punto 14.
24. IInstallare il coperchio della scheda a circuiti stampati di comunicazione DP
(19) utilizzando le la viti (18) rimosse al punto 13.
21.安装 DP 电缆盖板 B(O)。
22.将 DP 电缆盖板 C(P) 安装到 DP 电缆盖板 B(O) 上,使用步骤 15 中拆下
的 1 颗螺丝 (22) 来安装 DP 电缆盖板 C(P)。
23.使用在步骤 14 取下的 2 颗螺丝 (20) 来安装盖板 (21)。
24.使用在步骤 13 取下的 1 颗螺丝 (18) 来安装 DP 中继板的盖板 (19)。
21.DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 를 설치합니다 .
22.DP 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 DP 케이블 커버 B(O) 에 부착하고 스텝 15 에
서 제거한 나사 (22) 1 개로 케이블 커버 C(P) 를 부착합니다 .
23.스텝 14 에서 분리한 나사 (20) 2 개를 사용하여 커버 (21) 를 설치합니
다.
24.스텝 13 에서 분리한 나사 (18) 1 개를 사용하여 DP 중계기판 커버
(19) 를 설치합니다 .
21.DP ケーブルカバーB(O) を取り付ける。
22.DP ケーブルカバーC(P) を DP ケーブルカバーB(O) に取り付け、手順 15
で外したビス (22)1 本で固定する。
23.手順 14 で外したビス(20)2 本で、フタ(21)
を取り付ける。
24.手順 13 で外したビス (18)1 本で、
DP 中継基板カバー(19) を取り付け
る。
24
A
B
B
31
B
Fasten the original mat.
25.Place original mat (B) with its Velcro (31) upward over the contact glass.
Align original mat (B) corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel.
26.Close DP (A) and attach original mat (B) onto it with Velcro.
Fixer la plaque d’original.
25.Placer la plaque d’original (B) sur la vitre d’exposition, en orientant les bandes Velcro (31) vers le haut.
Aligner le coin du plateau d'original (B) faisant un angle de 90 degrés avec le coin gauche interne du panneau d'instructions d'original.
26.Abaisser le DP (A) et y fixer la plaque d’original (B) à l’aide des bandes Velcro.
Fije la alfombrilla para originales.
25.Coloque la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro (31) hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto.
Alinee la esquina que tiene un ángulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales (B) con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de
instrucciones para el original.
26.Cierre el DP (A) y fije la alfombrilla para originales (B) con el velcro.
Befestigen der Originalmatte.
25.Die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband (31) nach oben über das Kontaktglas legen.
Die Ecke der Originalmatte (B), die einen 90-Grad-Winkel aufweist, mit der linken, inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten.
26.Den DP (A) schließen und die Originalmatte (B) mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen.
Fissaggio del tappetino originale.
25.Posizionare il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro (31) rivolto verso l’alto sul vetro di appoggio.
Allineare l’angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale (B) con l’angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale.
26.Chiudere il DP (A) e applicarvi il tappetino originale (B) con il velcro.
粘贴原稿垫。
25.将原稿垫(B)放置在稿台玻璃上,并使魔术贴(31)向上。
将原稿垫(B)的 90 度角对准原稿指示板的内部左角。
26.关闭 DP(A),使原稿垫(B)粘贴到 DP 上。
원고매트 부착
25.벨크로 (31) 를 위로 향하게 하고 원고매트 (B) 를 원고대 유리판에 놓습니다 .
원고매트 (B) 는 90° 가 되어 있는 각을 원고 안내판의 좌측 안에 맞출 것 .
26.DP(A) 를 내리고 원고매트 (B) 를 DP(A) 에 부착합니다 .
原稿マットの貼り付け
25.マジックテープ (31) を上に向けて、
原稿マット (B) をコンタクトガラス上に置く。
原稿マット (B) は 90° になっている角を原稿指示板の左奥に合わせること。
26.DP(A) を下ろし、原稿マット (B) を DP(A) に貼り付ける。
25
I
B
H
J(M3x8)
Installing the hinge cover (DP-772 only)
For the DP-770(B), proceed to step 29 on page
27.
27.Install the left hinge cover (H).
28.Install the right hinge cover (I) using the M3
× 8 screw BLACK (J).
Installation des couvercles de charnière
(DP-772 uniquement)
Pour le DP-770(B), passer à l'étape 29 de la
page 27.
27.Installer le couvercle de la charnière gauche
(H).
28.Installer le couvercle de la charnière droite
(l) à l'aide de la vis M3 × 8 NOIRE (J).
Instalación de la cubierta de las bisagras
(DP-772 solamente)
Para el DP-770(B), vaya al paso 29 de la página
27.
27.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda
(H).
28.Instale la cubierta de la bisagra derecha (I)
usando el tornillo M3 × 8 NEGRO (J).
Installieren der Scharnierabdeckung
(nur DP-772)
Beim DP-770(B) gehen Sie zum Schritt 29 auf
Seite 27 weiter.
27.Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) anbringen.
28.Die rechte Scharnierabdeckung (I) mit der
M3 × 8 Schraube SCHWARZ (J) anbringen.
Installazione del coperchio cerniera
(solo DP-772)
Per DP-770(B), procedere con il punto 29 a
pagina 27.
27.Installare il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H).
28.Installare il coperchio cerniera destra (I) utilizzando la vite M3 × 8 NERA (J).
安装铰链盖板(仅限 DP-772)
DP-770(B) 跳至 P27 的步骤 29。
27.安装左部铰链盖板 (H)。
28.使用 1 颗 M3×8 螺丝 BLACK(J) 来安装右部铰
链盖板 (I)。
힌지커버 부착(DP-772 만)
DP-770(B) 은 P27 의 순서 29 으로 진행 .
27.좌측 힌지커버 (H) 를 부착합니다 .
28.나사 M3×8BLACK(J) 1 개로 우측 힌지커버
(I) 를 부착합니다 .
ヒンジカバーの取り付け
(DP-772 のみ)
DP-770(B) は、
P27 の手順 29 に進む。
27.左ヒンジカバー(H) を取り付ける。
28.ビス M3×8BLACK(J)1 本で右ヒンジカバー
(I) を取り付ける。
26
(a)
(b)
K
L
B
Adhere the label
29.Clean the label on the original table with
alcohol.
30.Adhere Label “Operation procedure” (K) of
which the language corresponding to the
destination of the MFP onto the existing
label on the original table. Figure (a)
31.Adhere Caution label “Original face up!” (L)
of which the language corresponding to the
destination of the MFP onto the label on the
original table. Figure (b)
Coller l’étiquette relative
29.Avec de l'alcool, nettoyer létiquette se trouvant sur le plateau d'original.
30.Coller l'étiquette “Processus opératoire” (K)
dans la langue correspondant au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette existante sur le
plateau d'original du DP. Figure (a)
31.Coller l'étiquette de mise en garde “Original
en haut!” (L) dans la langue correspondant
au destinataire du MFP sur l'étiquette du
plateau d'original. Figure (b)
Pegue la etiqueta
29.Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta
de originales.
30.Adhiera la etiqueta “Procedimiento operativo” (K) del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta que se
encuentra sobre la cubierta de originales.
Figura (a)
31.Pegue la etiqueta de precaución “¡La cara
del original hacia arriba!” (L), del idioma que
corresponde al destino del MFP, sobre la etiqueta en la cubierta de originales. Figura (b)
Anbringen des Schildes
29.Das Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld mit
Alkohol reinigen.
30.Das Schild „Funktionsanweisung“ (K) in der
Sprache des jeweiligen Einsatzlandes des
MFP auf das vorhandene Schild auf dem
Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (a)
31.Das Warnschild „Originalschriftseite nach
oben!“ (L) in der Sprache des jeweiligen
Einsatzlandes des MFP auf das vorhandene
Schild auf dem Originalbedienfeld aufkleben. Abbildung (b)
Applicazione dell’etichetta
29.Pulire con alcool l’etichetta sul piano originale.
30.Far aderire l’etichetta “Procedure di funzionamento” (K) corrispondente alla lingua di
destinazione dell’MFP, sull’etichetta esistente sul piano originale. Figura (a)
31.Far aderire l’etichetta di avvertenza “Originale rivolto verso l’alto!” (L) corrispondente
alla lingua di destinazione dell’MFP,
sull’etichetta del piano originale. Figura (b)
粘贴标签
29.不需要本步骤。
30.不需要本步骤。
31.不需要本步骤。
라벨 부착
29.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
30.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
31.이 단계가 필요하지 않습니다 .
ラベルの貼り付け
29.この作業は不要。
30.この作業は不要。
31.この作業は不要。
27
20mm
A
20mm
B
b
20mm
c
b
20mm
a
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]
1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作,准备一张 A3 原稿(a),距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线(b)并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线(c)。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿(a)并进行测试复印,确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
28
20mm
20mm
c
20mm
A
B
b
b
20mm
a
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchronisation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separación.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincronización de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿(a),如果偏移值在标准值以上时,对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
(注意)如果图像出现底灰,用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置,则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
(주의) 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。
MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
(注意)画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。
U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
29
A
B
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 32. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 35.
<Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 38.
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 32. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 35. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la synchronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 38.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.
Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 32. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 35. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 38.
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 32. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 35. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittellinie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 38.
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 32. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 35. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 38.
必须按照以下步骤进行调整,否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度
第 32 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度
第 35 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时,可以同时自动进行等倍值,前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整
第 38 页
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .
・선단경사확인 32 페이지 <기준치>단면:±3.0mm 이내 , 양면:±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 35 페이지 <기준치>단면:±3.0mm 이내 , 양면:±4.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 38 페이지 참조
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、
正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 32 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 35 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 38 ページ
30
A
B
For checking the magnification, see page41.
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 43.
For checking the center line, see page 45.
<Reference value> Within ±1.5%
<Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
<Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 41.
<Valeur de référence> ±1,5% max.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 43. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 45.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 41.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±1,5 %
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 43. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 45.
<Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 41.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 43.
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 45.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
<Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 41.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±1,5%
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 43. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 45.
<Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
・确认等倍值
・确认前端定时调整
・确认中心线
第 41 页
第 43 页
第 45 页
< 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
< 标准值 > ±2.5mm 以内
< 标准值 > 单面 :±2.0mm 以内,
双面 :±3.0mm 以内
・등배도 확인
41 페이지 <기준치> ±1.5% 이내
・선단 타이밍 확인 43 페이지 <기준치> ±2.5mm 이내
・센터 라인확인
45 페이지 <기준치> 단면:±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면:±3.0mm 이내
・等倍度確認
41 ページ
・先端タイミング確認 43 ページ
・センターライン確認 45 ページ
<基準値> ±1.5% 以内
<基準値> ±2.5mm 以内
<基準値>片面:±2.0mm 以内、
両面:±3.0mm 以内
31
A
B
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]
1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]
1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]
1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]
1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内。
双面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内
32
C (C*)
A
G
G
B
G
C (C*)
C
3
2. DP-770(B): Remove the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C).
DP-772: Remove the left hinge cover (H) and the angle control fitting (D). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14TP screws (G) on the left and right fixing fittings (C)(C*)
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. DP-770(B): Déposer la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations gauche et droite (C).
DP-772: Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (H) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (D). Desserrer les 2 vis TP M4 × 14 (G) sur les fixations
gauche et droite (C)(C*).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. DP-770(B): quite el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C).
DP-772: quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (H) y el herraje de control de ángulo (D). Afloje los 2 tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho (C)(C*).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. DP-770(B): Die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterung (C) lösen.
DP-772: Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (H) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (D) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen (C)(C*) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. DP-770(B): Rimuovere l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sugli accessori di fissaggio (C) destro e sinistro.
DP-772: Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (H) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (D). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14TP (G) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di
fissaggio (C)(C*) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.DP-770(B) 时 :拆下角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。
DP-772 时 :拆下左部铰链盖板 (H) 以及角度限制工具 (D)。拧松左右固定工具 (C)(C*) 的 2 颗 M4x14TP(G) 螺丝。
3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉(3)以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) :逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。 对于复印样本 (e) :顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量 :约 1.0mm
4.进行测试复印。
2.DP-770(B) 의 경우:각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C) 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
DP-772 의 경우:좌 힌지커버 (H) 및 각도 고정쇠 (D) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (C)(C*) 의 나사 M4x14TP(G) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우:조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 . 샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 : 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량:약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.DP-770(B) の場合:角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (C) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める
DP-772 の場合:左ヒンジカバー(H) および角度規制金具 (D) を取り外す。
左右の固定金具 (C)(C*) のビス M4x14TP(G)2 本を緩める。
3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合:調整ビスを左に回し、
DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合:調整ビスを右に回し、
DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量:約 1.0mm
4.テストコピーを行う。
33
A
B
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14TP screws (G) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see steps 23 and 24 on page 10) (see steps 25 and 26 on page 25).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis TP M4 × 14 (G) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 23 et 24 à la page 10) (Reportez-vous aux étapes 25 et 26 à la page
25).
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 × 14 (G) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 23 y 24 en la página 10) (vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 25).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14TP Schrauben (G), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 23 und 24 auf Seite 10) (siehe Schritte 25 und 26 auf Seite 25).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento> Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14TP (G) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 23 e 24 a pagina 10) (vedere i passi 25 e 26 a pagina 25).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后,重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14TP 螺丝(G)。
7.拆下原稿垫(B),参照第 10 页的步骤 23 和 24 或第 25 页的步骤 25 和 26 再次装上。
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내
6.조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14TP(G) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서 23, 24 및 25 페이지 순서 25, 26 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。
<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内
6.調整終了後、
手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14TP(G)2 本を締め付ける。
7.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、10 ページの手順 23、24 あるいは、
25 ページの手順 25、26 を参考に再度取り付ける。
34
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
a
f
3mm/4mm
2
g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]
1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]
1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]
1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]
1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值。如果超过标准值时,必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
35
A
3
5
A
9
B
6
8
7
10
4
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
mm (10)
Retighten the nut (8).
5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
6.Remove the original mat (B) and refit it (see
steps 23 and 24 on page 10)(see steps 25
and 26 on page 25).
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A).
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear
cover (7).
4.Adjust the height of DP.
Loosen the nut (8).
For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting
screw (9).
For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting
screw (9).
2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A)
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7)
du DP (A).
4.Réglez la hauteur du DP.
Desserrez l’écrou (8).
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis
de réglage (9).
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de
réglage (9).
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5
mm (10)
Resserrez l’écrou (8).
5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
6. Retirez le tapis d’original (B) et remettez-le en
place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 23 et 24 à la
page 10)(Reportez-vous aux étapes25 et 26 à la
page 25).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A).
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7).
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP
(A).
4.Ajuste la altura del DP.
Afloje la tuerca (8).
Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo
de ajuste (9).
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el
tornillo de ajuste (9).
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
el paso 3.
6. Desmonte la plancha de original (B) y vuelva a
colocar (vea los pasos 23 y 24 en la página
10)(vea los pasos 25 y 26 en la página 25).
2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen.
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A)
abnehmen.
4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen.
Lösen Sie die Mutter (8).
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (9).
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
(9) festziehen.
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm
(10)
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7)
wieder anbringen.
6. Die Originalmatte (B) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 23 und 24 auf Seite 10)
(siehe Schritte 25und 26 auf Seite 25).
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A).
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coperchio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A).
4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP
Allentare il dado (8).
Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite
di regolazione (9).
Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite
di regolazione (9).
Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
rimosso nel passo 3.
6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (B) e reinserirlo
(vedere i passi 23 e 24 a pagina 10)(vedere i
passi 25 e 26 a pagina 25).
2.打开 DP(A)的上盖板(3)。
3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5),将塑
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除,拆下 DP 主机
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。
4.调整 DP 的高度。
松驰螺母(8)。
复印样张(f)时 :松弛调整螺丝(9)。
复印样张(g)时 :紧固调整螺丝(9)。
每 1 格的移动量 :约 0.5mm(10)
将螺母(8)按原样紧固好。
5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板(7)。
6.拆下原稿垫(B),参照第 10 页的步骤 23 和
24 或第 25 页的步骤 25 和 26 再次装上。
2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 .
3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 .
4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 .
너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 .
샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우:조정나사 (9) 를 느슨
하게 합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우:조정나사 (9) 를 조입
니다 .
1 개 변화량:약 0.5mm(10)
너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
장착합니다 .
6.원고매트 (B) 를 제거하고 10 페이지 순서
23, 24 및 25 페이지 순서 25, 26 을 참고로
다시 부착합니다 .
2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。
3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、スト
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。
4.DP の高さを調整する。
ナット (8) をゆるめる。
コピーサンプル (f) の場合:調整ビス (9) を
ゆるめる。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合:調整ビス (9) を
締める。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量:約 0.5mm(10)
ナット (8) を元通り締める。
5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
取り付ける。
6.原稿マット (B) を取り外し、10 ページの手
順 23、24 あるいは、
25 ページの手順 25、26
を参考に再度取り付ける。
36
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
a
f
3mm/4mm
2
g
7.Make a proof copy again.
8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
7.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.
8.Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
Copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
7.Haga otra copia de prueba.
8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.
8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.
8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6,直至复印样张的线(2)为标准值内。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .
8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 6 을 반복합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내
7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ~ 6 を繰り返す。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
37
A
B
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment]
If there is no DP auto adjustment original.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411, select [DP Auto Adj] and press the
Start key to print an original.
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
surface adjustment.
4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
out rear-side adjustment.(DP-772 only)
5.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until OK appears.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage]
4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP
1. Régler le mode maintenance U411, sélectionner [DP Auto Adj] et appuyer sur la
touche Start pour imprimer un original.
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la
touche Start.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
procéder au réglage du côté arrière. (DP-772 uniquement)
5. Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message OK
apparaisse.
Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste]
4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP
1. Entre al modo de mantenimiento U441, seleccione [DP Auto Adj] y pulse la tecla
de Start para imprimir un original.
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start.
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
ajuste de anverso.
5.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca OK en
la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals]
4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist
1. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. DP [Auto Adj] wählen und die Start-Taste
betätigen, um ein Original auszudrucken.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betätigen.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale]
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, selezionare [DP Auto Adj] e premere
il tasto di Start per stampare un originale.
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start.
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per
eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
ajuste de reverso. (DP-772 solamente)
gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen. (nur DP-772 )
5. Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
bis OK angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore. ( Solo DP-772 )
5. Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
(ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
fino a quando appare OK.
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ]
没有 DP 调整用原稿时
1.设置维护模式 U411,按 [DP Auto Adj]、Start 键以输出原稿。
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上,按 Start 键。
3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上,按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。
4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上,按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限
DP-772)
5.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。
如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
重复步骤 2 和 4,直到 OK(完成)出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ]
DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP Auto Adj], 시작키를 눌러 원고를
4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합
니다 . (DP-772 만 )
5.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
출력합니다 .
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 .
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ]
DP 調整用原稿が無い場合
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP Auto Adj]、Start キーを押
し原稿を出力する。
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行
う。
38
4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、裏面の調整を行
う。(DP-772 のみ )
5.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。
ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
5mm
F
A
B
149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R
74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the
original from the place where F and R are marked.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceUp (Chart2)],
[Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
3.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until OK appears.
For details, see the service manual.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplacement des repères F et R.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au
réglage de la surface.
3.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ce que le message OK apparaisse.
Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R.
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar
el ajuste de anverso.
3.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca OK en
la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle setzen.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP Faceup (Chart2)], [Input]
und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
3.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis OK angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e disporre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R.
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP
FaceUp (Chart2)], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione
della superficie.
3.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
fino a quando appare OK.
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时
1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上,并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设
定原稿。
2.设置维护模式 U411,按顺序按 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、Start
键以进行正面的调整。
3.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。
如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
重复步骤 1 和 2,直到 OK(完成)出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우
1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceUp(Chart2)], [Input],
시작키의 순서로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
3.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ~ 2 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合
1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ
セットする。
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP FaceUp(Chart2)]、[Input]、
Start キーの順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
3.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。
ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 1 ~ 2 を繰り返す
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
39
5mm
A
B
F
149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R
74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. (DP-772 only)
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FaceDown (Chart2)],
[Normal Target], [Input] and the Start key in that order to carry out rearside adjustment.(DP-772 only)
6.If OK appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.(DP-772
only)
If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until OK appears.
For details, see the service manual.
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur
lequel F et R sont indiqués.( DP-772 uniquement)
5.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] et Start dans cet ordre
pour procéder au réglage du côté arrière.( DP-772 uniquement)
6.Si le message OK apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé. ( DP772 uniquement)
Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
jusqu'à ce que le message OK apparaisse.
Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R.(DP-772
solamente )
5.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] y la tecla de Start, en ese
orden, para realizar el ajuste de reverso.(DP-772 solamente )
6.Si aparece OK en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
(DP-772 solamente )
Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca OK en
la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den
DP eingeführt wird.(nur DP-772)
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal
6.Wenn am Display OK angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. (nur DP-772)
Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis OK angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Target], [Input] und die Start-Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die
Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.(nur DP-772)
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R.( Solo
DP-772 )
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP
FaceDown (Chart2)], [Normal Target], [Input] e il tasto di Start, per
eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.( Solo DP-772 )
6.Se OK appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. ( Solo DP-772 )
Se compare ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita.
Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5 fino a quando appare OK.
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
4.完成正面调整后,将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下,并首先将标有 F 和
R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。( 仅限 DP-772)
5.设置维护模式 U411,按顺序按 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、[Normal
Taget]、[Input]、Start 键以进行反面的调整。( 仅限 DP-772)
6.如果屏幕上出现 OK(完成),则表示调整完成。 ( 仅限 DP-772)
如果出现 ERROR XX(错误 XX),则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
重复步骤 4 和 5,直到 OK(完成)出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . (DP-772 만 )
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FaceDown(Chart2)],
[Normal Taget], [Input], 시작키 순서로 뒷면조정을 합니다 . (DP-
6.디스플레이에 OK 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 . (DP-772 만 )
ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
인하고 OK 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ~ 5 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
772 만 )
4.表面の調整完了後、
DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、
F、R が書かれて
いる方から DP へセットする。
(DP-772 のみ )
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP FaceDown(Chart2)]、
[Normal Taget]、[Input]、Start キーの順に押し、
裏面の調整を行う。
(DP-772 のみ )
40
6.ディスプレイに OK が表示されれば調整完了となる。
(DP-772 のみ )
ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
認し、OK が表示されるまで手順 4 ~ 5 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
X
X'
X'
X
X
X'
X'
2
X
1
a
A
3
3
B
2
h
i
-1.5%
j
X
X'
X
100
k
+1.5%
[Checking the magnification]
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
(DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification (DP772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification (DP772)
[Vérification de l’agrandissement]
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem-
2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5%
Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner (arrière)(DP770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner (DP-772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner (DP772)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño]
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia>
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung]
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento]
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
compreso fra ±1,5%
2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(lato posteriore)(DP770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner. (DP-772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner (DP-772)
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
escáner.(anverso)
Sub Scan(B): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del escáner
(reverso) (DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
(DP-772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
escáner (DP-772)
Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung (DP-772)
Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung (DP-772)
[ 确认等倍值 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)、(3)之间的偏移值。
如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 >
对于副扫描方向,线(2)的上下偏移值 :±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向,线(3)的左右偏移值 :±1.5% 以内
2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。
Sub Scan(F) :读取副扫描等倍度的调整(正面)
Sub Scan(B) :读取副扫描等倍度的调整(反面)(DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS) :CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-772)
Sub Scan(CIS) :CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整 (DP-772)
[ 등배도확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 .
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이:±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이:±1.5% 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .
Sub Scan(F):스캔 부주사등배도의 조정(표면)
Sub Scan(B):스캔 부주사등배도의 조정(뒷면)(DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사 등배도의 조정 (DP-772)
Sub Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 부주사 등배도의 조정 (DP-772)
[ 等倍度確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>
副走査方向の場合、
線 (2) の上下ずれ:±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、
線 (3) の左右ずれ:±1.5% 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、
調整を行う。
Sub Scan(F):読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
Sub Scan(B):読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面 )(DP-770(B))
Main Scan(CIS):CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整 (DP-772)
Sub Scan(CIS):CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 (DP-772)
41
X
X'
A
X'
X
3
3
B
X
X'
X'
2
X
1
a
2
h
i
-1.5%
j
X
X'
X
100
k
+1.5%
3.Adjust the values.
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value.
Amount of change per step: 0.10 %
4.Perform a test copy.
5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
example shows the reference value.
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs.
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) :
augmenter la valeur.
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) :
diminuer la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,10 %
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
<Valeur de référence>
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
est de ±1,5%
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores.
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,10 %
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
(2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
<Valor de referencia>
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen.
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,10 %
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,10 %
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento
della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento>
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。
在长度偏短时 复印样本(h)(j):调高设定值
在长度偏长时 复印样本(i)(k):调低设定值
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.10%
4.进行测试复印。
5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)、(3)之间的偏移值达
到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 >
对于副扫描方向,线(2)的上下偏移值 :±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向,线(3)的左右偏移值 :±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 .
길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j):설정치를 높입니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k):설정치를 내립니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량:0.10%
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ~ 4 를 반복합
니다 .
<기준치>
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이:±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이:±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。
長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j):設定値を上げる
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k):設定値を下げる
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.10%
4.テストコピーを行う。
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4
を繰り返す。
<基準値>
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ:±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ:±1.5% 以内
42
2.5mm
A
2.5mm
2
a
B
2
1
l
m
[Checking the leading edge timing]
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-772)
CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.(DP-772)
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant]
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior]
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2)
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia>
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.(DP-772)
CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.(DP-772)
Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).(DP-770(B))
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings]
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-772)
CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.(DP-772)
Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)(DP-770(B))
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale]
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2)
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento,
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
sincronizzazione.
Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.(DP-772)
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.(DP-772)
Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteriore)(DP-770(B))
[ 确认前端定时调整 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏
移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 >
线(2)的上下偏移值 :±2.5mm 以内
2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
Front Head :调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
Front Tail :调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
CIS Head :调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位 (DP-772)
CIS Tail :调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时 (DP-772)
Back Head :调整前端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
Back Tail :调整后端定时 ( 反面 )(DP-770(B))
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>
선 (2) 의 상하차이:±2.5mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .
Front Head :선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
Front Tail :후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
CIS Head: CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-772)
CIS Tail: CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .(DP-772)
Back Head :선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
Back Tail :후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .(DP-770(B))
[ 先端タイミング確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ
が基準値外の場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>
線 (2) の上下ずれ:±2.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、
調整を行う。
Front Head :先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
Front Tail :後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
CIS Head: CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する (DP-772)
CIS Tail: CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する (DP-772)
Back Head: 先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))
Back Tail: 後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する (DP-770(B))
Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (rear side)(DP-770(B))
Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-772)
CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.(DP-772)
Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)(DP-770(B))
Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)(DP-770(B))
43
2.5mm
A
2.5mm
2
B
2
1
a
l
m
3.Adjust the values.
For the faster leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the
value.
For the slower leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.17 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
shows the reference value.
<Reference value>
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
3.Régler les valeurs.
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur.
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,17 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
<Valeur de référence>
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
3.Ajuste los valores.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de
copia (l): disminuye el valor.
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,17 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
(2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
<Valor de referencia>
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen.
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert verringern.
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,17 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
<Bezugswert>
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
3.Regolare i valori.
Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l):
riduce il valore.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m):
aumenta il valore.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,17 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento>
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
3.调整设定值。
在前端定时偏快时 复印样本(l):调低设定值
在前端定时偏慢时 复印样本(m):调高设定值
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.17mm
4.进行测试复印。
5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范
围内。
< 标准值 >
线(2)的上下偏移值 :±2.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 .
선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l):설정치를 내립니다 .
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m):설정치를 올립니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량:0.17mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ~ 4 를 반복합니다
.
<기준치>
선 (2) 의 상하차이:±2.5mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。
先端タイミングが早い場合コピーサンプル (l):設定値を下げる。
先端タイミングが遅い場合コピーサンプル (m):設定値を上げる。
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.17mm
4.テストコピーを行う。
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を繰
り返す。
<基準値>
線 (2) の上下ずれ:±2.5mm 以内
44
2mm/3mm
2mm/3mm
A
B
1
2
a
2
n
o
[Checking the center line]
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line (DP-/772)
[Vérification de la ligne médiane]
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS (DP-772)
[Verificación de la línea central]
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia>
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
±3,0 mm
2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS (DP-772)
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie]
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mittellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie (DP-772)
[Controllo della linea centrale]
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS (DP-772)
[ 确认中心线 ]
1.确认原稿(a)中心线(1)和复印样本中心线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏
移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±2.0mm 以内
双面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。
Front :中心位置(正面)的调整
Back :中心位置(反面)的调整
CIS :CIS 的中心位置的调整 (DP-772)
[ 센터 라인 확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .
Front:센터 위치(표면)의 조정
Back:센터 위치(뒷면)의 조정
CIS:CIS 의 센터 위치조정 (DP-772)
[ センターライン確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±2.0mm 以内
両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、
調整を行う。
Front:センター位置(表面)
の調整
Back:センター位置(裏面)の調整
CIS:CIS のセンター位置の調整 (DP-772)
45
2mm/3mm
2mm/3mm
A
B
1
2
a
2
n
o
3. Adjust the values.
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Increases the value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Decreases the value.
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
shows the reference value.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
3.Régler les valeurs.
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers
l’avant : augmenter la valeur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur :
diminuer la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
3.Ajuste los valores.
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n):
aumenta el valor.
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): disminuye
el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
(2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
<Valor de referencia>
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
±3,0 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen.
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert
erhöhen.
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert
verringern.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori.
Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): aumenta il
valore.
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): riduce il
valore.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo
scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
riferimento.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
3.调整设定值。
当中心向前偏移时 复印样本(n):调高设定值
当中心向内偏移时 复印样本(o):调低设定值
设定值的一个调整单位变化量 :0.085mm
4.进行测试复印。
5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4,直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范
围内。
< 标准值 >
单面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±2.0mm 以内
双面复印时,中心线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 .
센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n):설정치를 높입니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 내립니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량:0.085mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ~ 4 를
반복합니다 .
<기준치>
단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이:±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。
センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n):設定値を上げ
る。
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を下げる。
1 ステップ当たりの変化量:0.085mm
4.テストコピーを行う。
5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ~ 4 を
繰り返す。
<基準値>
片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±2.0mm 以内
両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
46
2014.4
303P256730-01
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
Headquarters
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
Phone: +1-973-808-8444
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100
Miami, Florida 33166, USA
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Fax: +1-305-421-6666
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Fax: +1-905-670-8116
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba-SP, CEP 06543-306,
Brazil
Phone: +55-11-4195-8496
Fax: +55-11-4195-6167
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588
KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand
Phone: +64-9-415-4517
Fax: +64-9-415-4597
KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2610-2181
Fax: +852-2610-2063
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(China) Corporation
8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Bangsue, Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +66-2-586-0278
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Singapore Pte. Ltd.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Fax: +65-6748-3788
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Hong Kong Limited
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road
Tsuenwan, NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
18F, Kangnam bldg, 1321-1,
Seocho-Dong, Seocho-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
Fax: +822-747-0084
KYOCERA Document Solutions
India Private Limited
First Floor, ORCHID CENTRE
Sector-53, Golf Course Road, Gurgaon 122 002,
India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Fax: +31-20-653-1256
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Fax: +31-20-5877260
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
United Kingdom
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Via Verdi, 89/91 20063 Cernusco s/N.(MI),
Italy
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Belgium
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
France
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
Eduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 95, 1230 Vienna,
Austria
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Postboks 150 Oppsal, 0619 Oslo,
Norway
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Denmark
Phone: +45-70223880
Fax: +45-45765850
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Portugal
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Fax: +351-21-849-3312
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.
KYOCERA Document Solutions
South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain
Phone: +34-91-6318392
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa.
Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,
Finland
Phone: +358-9-47805200
Fax: +358-9-47805390
Botanichesky pereulok 5, Moscow, 129090,
Russia
Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,
Switzerland
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971-04-433-0412
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
© 2014 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation
Download PDF

advertising